hit_7060_umn

s

Instructions

TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 4.1 LCT

User Manual

A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

User Manual Instructions TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 4.1 LCT

Copyright (C) Siemens AG 2007

Issued by the Communications Group Hofmannstraße 51 D-81359 München

Technical modifications possible. Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as they are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written contract.

2 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Important Notice on Product Safety Elevated voltages are inevitably present at specific points in this electrical equipment. Some of the parts may also have elevated operating temperatures. Systems with forced ventilation have rotating items. Non-observance of these conditions and the safety instructions can result in personal injury or in property damage. The system complies with the standard EN 60950-1 / IEC 60950-1. All equipment connected has to comply with the applicable safety standards. Mount the systems in areas with restricted access only. Only trained and qualified personnel may install, operate, and maintain the systems. The same text in German: Wichtiger Hinweis zur Produktsicherheit In elektrischen Anlagen stehen zwangsläufig bestimmte Teile der Geräte unter Spannung. Einige Teile können auch eine hohe Betriebstemperatur aufweisen. Anlagen mit Zwangsbelüftung haben drehende Teile. Eine Nichtbeachtung dieser Situation und der Warnungshinweise kann zu Körperverletzungen und Sachschäden führen. Das System entspricht den Anforderungen der EN 60950-1 / IEC 60950-1. Angeschlossene Geräte müssen die zutreffenden Sicherheitsbestimmungen erfüllen. Die Anlagen dürfen nur in Betriebsstätten mit beschränktem Zutritt aufgebaut werden. Die Anlagen dürfen nur durch geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal installiert, betrieben und gewartet werden. Trademarks: All designations used in this document can be trademarks, the use of which by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of their owners.

!

Instructions User ManualTNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 4.1 LCT

A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 3

Contents

1 Notes on this Documentation ..................................................................................19 1.1 Customer Documentation........................................................................................19 1.2 Complementary Documents....................................................................................19 1.3 Symbols Used in the Customer Documentation .....................................................20 1.3.1 Symbol for Warnings ...............................................................................................20 1.3.2 Symbols for Notes ...................................................................................................20 1.3.3 Symbols for Menu Displays and Text Inputs...........................................................20 1.4 Notes on Licensed Software ...................................................................................20

2 Introduction..............................................................................................................21

3 Features ..................................................................................................................24

4 Hardware Configuration ..........................................................................................26

5 Software Configuration............................................................................................27

6 Installation ...............................................................................................................28 6.1 Route Configuration.................................................................................................28 6.2 Installing the LCT software package .......................................................................33 6.3 Uninstalling the LCT Software Package..................................................................38

7 Starting and Shutting down TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT ............................40 7.1 Starting TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT ...........................................................40 7.2 Shutting Down TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT ................................................43

8 Main Interface Features ..........................................................................................44 8.1 Main Window...........................................................................................................44 8.1.1 Title Bar ...................................................................................................................44 8.1.2 Main Menu Bar ........................................................................................................44 8.1.3 Work Area................................................................................................................48 8.2 Submenus (with Right Mouse Button Click)............................................................48 8.2.1 SDH Card ................................................................................................................48 8.2.2 CC Card...................................................................................................................48 8.2.3 SC Card...................................................................................................................49 8.2.4 Ethernet Card ..........................................................................................................49 8.2.5 RPR Card ................................................................................................................50

9 Security Management..............................................................................................51 9.1 Account Management .............................................................................................51 9.1.1 User .........................................................................................................................51 9.1.2 Group.......................................................................................................................57 9.1.3 View.........................................................................................................................60 9.2 Change Password ...................................................................................................61 9.3 Lock Screen.............................................................................................................61

10 NE Configuration and Management ........................................................................63 10.1 Chassis View...........................................................................................................63 10.2 Synchronize NE.......................................................................................................64 10.3 NE Property Configuration ......................................................................................65


4 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

10.4 Warm Reboot NE ....................................................................................................67 10.5 Cold Reboot NE.......................................................................................................67 10.6 Shut down NE..........................................................................................................68 10.7 Add Extension Shelf ................................................................................................68 10.8 Delete Extension Shelf ............................................................................................71 10.9 FTP Setting..............................................................................................................71 10.10 NE Software Management ......................................................................................72 10.11 MIB Management ....................................................................................................75 10.12 NE Time Setting ......................................................................................................76 10.13 NE Trap Destination Configuration..........................................................................77 10.14 NE Resource Usage Statistics ................................................................................78

11 SDH Configuration and Management .....................................................................79 11.1 Card Configuration and Management .....................................................................79 11.1.1 SDH Card Configuration and Management.............................................................79 11.1.2 Synchronize the Card ..............................................................................................80 11.1.3 Delete Card..............................................................................................................81 11.1.4 Cold Reboot Card....................................................................................................81 11.2 SDH Port Configuration and Management..............................................................81 11.2.1 Port Properties.........................................................................................................82 11.2.2 Port Status ...............................................................................................................83 11.3 OA Port Configuration .............................................................................................86 11.4 E1 Port Configuration ..............................................................................................89 11.5 Cross-Connection Configuration and Management ................................................90 11.5.1 Querying Current Cross-Connection .......................................................................91 11.5.2 Adding a New Cross-Connection ............................................................................91 11.5.3 Deleting a Cross-connection ...................................................................................92 11.6 TP Configuration and Management ........................................................................93 11.6.1 Querying Current Terminal Point.............................................................................93 11.6.2 TP Multiplexing Structure ........................................................................................95 11.7 Synchronization Management .................................................................................97 11.7.1 Global Setting ..........................................................................................................99 11.7.2 Configuring the Timing Source of NE......................................................................99 11.7.3 Configuring the System Clock ...............................................................................101 11.7.4 Configuring the Reference.....................................................................................102 11.8 EOW Configuration................................................................................................103

12 Ethernet Configuration and Management .............................................................105 12.1 Card Configuration and Management ...................................................................105 12.2 Bridge Configuration..............................................................................................107 12.3 LAN Card Configuration and Management ...........................................................109 12.3.1 LAN Port Configuration..........................................................................................109 12.3.2 Rate Limit Configuration ........................................................................................112 12.3.3 CoS Configuration .................................................................................................114 12.3.4 Egress Priority Weight Configuration ....................................................................116 12.4 WAN Port Configuration ........................................................................................117 12.5 WAN Ports TP Structure........................................................................................121 12.6 VLAN Management ...............................................................................................122


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 5

12.7 Static MAC Address Configuration........................................................................125 12.8 ACL Configuration .................................................................................................127 12.9 Static Multicast Configuration................................................................................129 12.10 IGMP Snooping .....................................................................................................131 12.11 RSTP Configuration...............................................................................................133

13 RPR Configuration and Management ...................................................................135 13.1 RPR Station Configuration ....................................................................................135 13.1.1 RPR Station Basic Configuration ..........................................................................135 13.1.2 RPR Station Fairness Configuration .....................................................................137 13.1.3 RPR Station OAM Configuration ...........................................................................139 13.1.4 RPR Station Protection Configuration...................................................................140 13.1.5 RPR Station Span Protection Switch Configuration..............................................141 13.2 RPR Topo Table....................................................................................................141 13.3 RPR Client Port Configuration...............................................................................142 13.4 RPR WAN Port Configuration ...............................................................................144 13.5 RPR Static Multicast configuration ........................................................................146 13.6 RPR Service Configuration ...................................................................................147 13.6.1 Basic Information...................................................................................................148 13.6.2 Add Station ............................................................................................................148 13.7 RPR Service Management....................................................................................151 13.7.1 Service Detail ........................................................................................................152 13.7.2 Modify RPR Service ..............................................................................................154

14 Protection Management ........................................................................................156 14.1 CC 1+1 Protection .................................................................................................156 14.2 Equipment Protection ............................................................................................157 14.2.1 1+1 Equipment Protection.....................................................................................157 14.2.2 1:N Equipment Protection ....................................................................................160 14.3 SNCP Management...............................................................................................162 14.3.1 Viewing and Modifying SNCP ...............................................................................163 14.3.2 Creating SNCP......................................................................................................165 14.3.3 Deleting SNCP ......................................................................................................165 14.3.4 Switching SNCP ....................................................................................................166 14.4 MSP Management.................................................................................................166 14.4.1 Create MSP...........................................................................................................167 14.4.2 Delete MSP ...........................................................................................................168 14.4.3 View/Modify MSP ..................................................................................................169 14.4.4 Switch MSP ...........................................................................................................169 14.5 MS-SPRing Management......................................................................................170 14.5.1 Creating MS-SPRing .............................................................................................171 14.5.2 Delete a Ring.........................................................................................................173 14.5.3 Ring Property.........................................................................................................174 14.5.4 Add/Delete NE.......................................................................................................179

15 DCN Management.................................................................................................180 15.1 Change NE IP........................................................................................................180 15.2 Change Ethernet IP...............................................................................................180 15.3 DCC Management.................................................................................................181


6 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

15.4 OSI Configuration ..................................................................................................182 15.5 GRE Tunnel ...........................................................................................................183 15.6 MGMT Port RIP Configuration...............................................................................185 15.7 IP Route Configuration ..........................................................................................185 15.7.1 IP Interface ............................................................................................................185 15.7.2 IP Static Route.......................................................................................................186 15.7.3 IP Routing Table....................................................................................................188 15.8 OSPF.....................................................................................................................189 15.8.1 OSPF General .......................................................................................................190 15.8.2 OSPF Area ............................................................................................................191 15.8.3 OSPF Interface......................................................................................................194 15.8.4 OSPF Interface Metric ...........................................................................................196 15.8.5 OSPF Neighbor .....................................................................................................197 15.9 Route Redistribution ..............................................................................................199

16 Maintenance ..........................................................................................................200 16.1 PRBSTest Management........................................................................................200 16.1.1 Query Current PRBS Status of Ports ....................................................................200 16.1.2 Set PRBS Testing..................................................................................................201 16.2 Loop-back Test Management................................................................................201 16.2.1 Querying Loopback Status ....................................................................................202 16.2.2 Setting Loopback Test...........................................................................................202 16.3 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management.....................................................................203 16.4 LED Test................................................................................................................205

17 Performance Monitoring Management ..................................................................207 17.1 Overview of Performance Monitoring ....................................................................207 17.1.1 SDH Performance Monitoring................................................................................207 17.1.1.1 PM in Regeneration Section (G.829) ....................................................................207 17.1.1.2 PM in Multiplex Section (G.829)............................................................................208 17.1.1.3 PM for HP/LP (High Order and Low Order Paths) (G.829) ...................................209 17.1.1.4 PM for Pointer Justification Counts at Administrative Unit (G.707).......................210 17.1.2 Data Performance Monitoring................................................................................211 17.1.3 RPR Performance Monitoring................................................................................211 17.2 SDH Performance Monitoring................................................................................212 17.2.1 Filter Setting...........................................................................................................214 17.2.2 Edit Monitored Parameter......................................................................................215 17.2.3 Edit Threshold .......................................................................................................216 17.2.4 History SDH Performance .....................................................................................218 17.2.5 SDH Unavailiable Periods .....................................................................................219 17.3 Ethernet Performance Monitoring Configuration...................................................221 17.3.1 Filter Setting...........................................................................................................223 17.3.2 Editing Monitored Parameter.................................................................................225 17.3.3 5-Second Ethernet Performance...........................................................................225 17.3.4 History Ethernet Performance ...............................................................................227 17.4 Ethernet VLAN Performance Monitoring Configuration ........................................228 17.4.1 Enable Setting .......................................................................................................229 17.4.1.1 Port and VLAN Filter..............................................................................................229


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 7

17.4.2 History Ethernet VLAN Performance.....................................................................230 17.4.2.1 Filter Setting ..........................................................................................................231 17.4.3 5-Second Ethernet VLAN Performance ................................................................232 17.5 Current E1 Bit Slip Performance ...........................................................................233 17.5.1 Filter Setting ..........................................................................................................234 17.5.2 Editing Monitored Parameter.................................................................................235 17.5.3 Edit Threshold .......................................................................................................236 17.5.4 History E1 Bit Slip Performance ............................................................................237 17.6 PDH CRC Performance Monitoring.......................................................................237 17.6.1 Filter Setting ..........................................................................................................238 17.6.1.1 Port Filter ...............................................................................................................239 17.6.1.2 Parameter Filter.....................................................................................................240 17.6.2 Editing Monitored Parameter.................................................................................240 17.6.3 Edit Threshold .......................................................................................................241 17.6.4 History PDH CRC Performance ............................................................................242 17.6.5 PDH CRC Unavailiable Periods ............................................................................244 17.7 RPR Span Performance Monitoring Configuration ...............................................245 17.7.1 Filter.......................................................................................................................247 17.7.2 Edit Monitored Parameter .....................................................................................248 17.7.3 RPR Span History Value .......................................................................................249 17.8 RPR MAC Client Performance Monitoring Configuration......................................251 17.8.1 Filter.......................................................................................................................252 17.8.2 Edit Monitored Parameter .....................................................................................253 17.8.3 RPR MAC Client History Value .............................................................................254

18 Alarms and Event Management ............................................................................256 18.1 Overview of Alarms ...............................................................................................256 18.2 NE Alarms .............................................................................................................256 18.2.1 Current Alarms ......................................................................................................256 18.2.2 Viewing Active Alarms...........................................................................................257 18.2.3 Reviewing the Current Alarms...............................................................................259 18.2.4 Viewing Alarm Detail .............................................................................................260 18.2.5 Clearing Alarms.....................................................................................................260 18.2.6 Alarm Search.........................................................................................................260 18.2.7 History Alarms .......................................................................................................261 18.3 LED Indicators .......................................................................................................264 18.4 Exporting Alarms ...................................................................................................265 18.4.1 Exporting Active Alarms to a File ..........................................................................265 18.4.2 Printing Active Alarms ...........................................................................................267 18.5 Configuring Fault Management .............................................................................268 18.5.1 Audio Alarm Configuration ....................................................................................268 18.5.2 Alarm Type List Management ...............................................................................269 18.6 Alarm Configuration for Single NE ........................................................................271 18.6.1 AIS/RDI Alarm Configuration.................................................................................271 18.6.2 Alarm Inhibit Configuration ....................................................................................272 18.6.3 Alarm Persistent Time Configuration.....................................................................273 18.6.4 Alarm Out Configuration........................................................................................273 18.6.5 MDI/MDO Configuration ........................................................................................274


8 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

18.7 Displaying the Event Log.......................................................................................275 18.7.1 Interpreting the Event Log .....................................................................................276 18.7.2 Management Events..............................................................................................276 18.7.3 Hardware Events ...................................................................................................277 18.7.4 Software Events ....................................................................................................277 18.7.5 Event Search .........................................................................................................278

19 How To ..................................................................................................................280 19.1 Creating a TU-12 Cross-Connection between STM-16 and STM-1......................280 19.2 Creating Timing Synchronized Network ................................................................285 19.3 Configuring Layer 2 100Mbps Ethernet Service....................................................291 19.4 Monitoring One STM-16 Port Current Performance..............................................299 19.5 Creating Multiplex-Section Protection between Two NEs.....................................303 19.6 Creating SNCP Using 2 Ports of STM-1 ...............................................................305 19.7 Creating MS-SPRing Protection for STM-16 Ring ................................................308 19.8 Creating 1+1 Equipment Protection for Electrical STM-1 Card.............................312 19.9 Creating RPR Service Station ...............................................................................314

20 Abbreviation...........................................................................................................319

21 Index ......................................................................................................................321


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 9

Illustrations Fig. 2.1 TNMS-M Series Products .....................................................................................21 Fig. 6.1 Open Hyper Terminal ...........................................................................................28 Fig. 6.2 Hyper Terminal--Connection Description .............................................................29 Fig. 6.3 Hyper Terminal--Connect To ................................................................................29 Fig. 6.4 Hyper Terminal--COM1 Properties.......................................................................30 Fig. 6.5 CLI Window--Welcome to Login ...........................................................................30 Fig. 6.6 Main Menu ............................................................................................................31 Fig. 6.7 User Table ............................................................................................................31 Fig. 6.8 Edit a Given User..................................................................................................32 Fig. 6.9 IP Address Configuration......................................................................................32 Fig. 6.10 Add Static Route Information................................................................................33 Fig. 6.11 Setup Wizard Welcome Screen............................................................................34 Fig. 6.12 License Agreement...............................................................................................34 Fig. 6.13 Select Destination Location ..................................................................................35 Fig. 6.14 Select Start Menu Folder ......................................................................................35 Fig. 6.15 Select Additional Tasks ........................................................................................36 Fig. 6.16 Ready to Install .....................................................................................................36 Fig. 6.17 Installing................................................................................................................37 Fig. 6.18 Exit Setup..............................................................................................................37 Fig. 6.19 Completing the Setup ...........................................................................................38 Fig. 6.20 Uninstall TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT .......................................................38 Fig. 6.21 Confirm Window for Uninstall ...............................................................................38 Fig. 6.22 Uninstall Status.....................................................................................................39 Fig. 6.23 Completing Uninstalling Process..........................................................................39 Fig. 7.1 Desktop Icon.........................................................................................................40 Fig. 7.2 Start LCT from Start Menu....................................................................................40 Fig. 7.3 Start LCT from quick lanch icon ...........................................................................40 Fig. 7.4 LCT Login Window1 .............................................................................................41 Fig. 7.5 LCT Login Window2 .............................................................................................41 Fig. 7.6 LCT GUI................................................................................................................42 Fig. 8.1 Main Window ........................................................................................................44 Fig. 9.1 Security Menu.......................................................................................................51 Fig. 9.2 Account Management...........................................................................................51 Fig. 9.3 Create New User ..................................................................................................52 Fig. 9.4 New User Added View..........................................................................................53 Fig. 9.5 Select Groups .......................................................................................................53 Fig. 9.6 User Profile ...........................................................................................................54 Fig. 9.7 Setting User Profile...............................................................................................54 Fig. 9.8 Permitted Operations for User..............................................................................55 Fig. 9.9 Operation Logs for User .......................................................................................55 Fig. 9.10 Remove User........................................................................................................56 Fig. 9.11 Confirmation Window............................................................................................56 Fig. 9.12 Reset Password....................................................................................................56 Fig. 9.13 Create New Group................................................................................................57 Fig. 9.14 New Group Added View .......................................................................................58 Fig. 9.15 Select Users .........................................................................................................58 Fig. 9.16 Permitted operations for Group ............................................................................59 Fig. 9.17 Assign Group Permissions ...................................................................................60 Fig. 9.18 Change Password ................................................................................................61


10 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 9.19 Lock Screen ......................................................................................................... 61 Fig. 9.20 LockScreen Config............................................................................................... 62 Fig. 10.1 Chassis View ....................................................................................................... 63 Fig. 10.2 Refresh Chassis................................................................................................... 64 Fig. 10.3 Synchronize NE ................................................................................................... 65 Fig. 10.4 Main Shelf Property Configuration....................................................................... 66 Fig. 10.5 Warm Reboot NE................................................................................................. 67 Fig. 10.6 Confirmation for warm rebooting NE ................................................................... 67 Fig. 10.7 Cold Reboot NE................................................................................................... 67 Fig. 10.8 Confirmation for cold rebooting NE...................................................................... 68 Fig. 10.9 Shut down NE...................................................................................................... 68 Fig. 10.10 Shut down Information......................................................................................... 68 Fig. 10.11 Add Extension Shelf............................................................................................. 69 Fig. 10.12 MSP Protection .................................................................................................... 70 Fig. 10.13 Delete Extension Shelves.................................................................................... 71 Fig. 10.14 FTP Setting .......................................................................................................... 71 Fig. 10.15 FTP Root.............................................................................................................. 72 Fig. 10.16 NE Software Management................................................................................... 73 Fig. 10.17 FTP Setting .......................................................................................................... 73 Fig. 10.18 NE Software Switch Result Windows .................................................................. 74 Fig. 10.19 MIB Management <Upload> tab.......................................................................... 75 Fig. 10.20 MIB Management <Download> tab ..................................................................... 75 Fig. 10.21 NE Time Setting................................................................................................... 76 Fig. 10.22 NE Destination ..................................................................................................... 77 Fig. 10.23 Confirmation for Delete........................................................................................ 77 Fig. 10.24 NE Resource Usage Statistics............................................................................. 78 Fig. 11.1 Card Properties.................................................................................................... 79 Fig. 11.2 Synchronize Card ................................................................................................ 81 Fig. 11.3 SDH Port Properties ............................................................................................ 82 Fig. 11.4 Advanced Port Status Information ....................................................................... 83 Fig. 11.5 OA Port Properties-Basic..................................................................................... 87 Fig. 11.6 OA Port Properties-Module.................................................................................. 88 Fig. 11.7 E1 Port Configuration........................................................................................... 89 Fig. 11.8 Cross Connect Management ............................................................................... 91 Fig. 11.9 Create Cross-Connect ......................................................................................... 92 Fig. 11.10 Confirmation for deleting Cross-Connections...................................................... 93 Fig. 11.11 TP Configuration (View 1 - As Presented)........................................................... 93 Fig. 11.12 TP Configuration (View 2 - Engaged) .................................................................. 94 Fig. 11.13 TP Multiplexing Structure Query.......................................................................... 95 Fig. 11.14 TP Multiplexing Structure, View 1........................................................................ 95 Fig. 11.15 TP Multiplexing Structure, View 2........................................................................ 96 Fig. 11.16 Modify Mapping.................................................................................................... 96 Fig. 11.17 Synchronization Management ............................................................................. 98 Fig. 11.18 Global Settings..................................................................................................... 99 Fig. 11.19 Station Clock Setting Reference Time IN .......................................................... 100 Fig. 11.20 Station Clock Settings Reference Time Out ...................................................... 100 Fig. 11.21 Station Clock Setting Reference Time Out (Clock Out Reference)................... 101 Fig. 11.22 System Clock ..................................................................................................... 101 Fig. 11.23 Timing Source Reference Properties................................................................. 102 Fig. 11.24 EOW Config Window ......................................................................................... 103 Fig. 12.1 Card Properties for Ethernet L2 Card ................................................................ 105


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 11

Fig. 12.2 Card Properties for Ethernet Transparent Card .................................................106 Fig. 12.3 Bridge Configuration ...........................................................................................108 Fig. 12.4 LAN Port Property Configuration (1)...................................................................110 Fig. 12.5 LAN Port Property Configuration (2)...................................................................112 Fig. 12.6 VLAN Rate Limit Configuration...........................................................................113 Fig. 12.7 Add VLAN Rate Limit..........................................................................................113 Fig. 12.8 VLAN+Port CoS Configuration ...........................................................................115 Fig. 12.9 Add VLAN CoS ...................................................................................................115 Fig. 12.10 Egress Priority Weight Configuration................................................................117 Fig. 12.11 Modify Priority Weight.......................................................................................117 Fig. 12.12 WAN Port Configuration (1) ................................................................................118 Fig. 12.13 WAN Port Configuration (2) ................................................................................118 Fig. 12.14 Bandwidth Management .....................................................................................119 Fig. 12.15 Summary of Virtual Containers...........................................................................121 Fig. 12.16 WAN Ports TP Structure.....................................................................................122 Fig. 12.17 VLAN Management ............................................................................................123 Fig. 12.18 VLAN Configuration Based on VLAN .................................................................124 Fig. 12.19 VLAN Configuration Based on Ports ..................................................................125 Fig. 12.20 Static MAC Address Configuration .....................................................................126 Fig. 12.21 Add Static MAC Address ....................................................................................126 Fig. 12.22 Modify Static MAC Address................................................................................127 Fig. 12.23 ACL Configuration ..............................................................................................128 Fig. 12.24 Add ACL..............................................................................................................128 Fig. 12.25 Static Multicast Configuration .............................................................................129 Fig. 12.26 Add Static Multicast ............................................................................................130 Fig. 12.27 IGMP Snooping-IP Multicast Group ...................................................................131 Fig. 12.28 IGMP Snooping-MAC Multicast Group...............................................................132 Fig. 12.29 IGMP Snooping- VLAN Multicast Router............................................................132 Fig. 12.30 RSTP Property Configuration .............................................................................133 Fig. 12.31 Port RSTP Configuration ....................................................................................134 Fig. 13.1 Open RPR Station Configuration........................................................................135 Fig. 13.2 RPR Station Configuration..................................................................................136 Fig. 13.3 Basic Fairness Configuration..............................................................................138 Fig. 13.4 Advanced Fairness Configuration ......................................................................138 Fig. 13.5 OAM Configuration .............................................................................................139 Fig. 13.6 RPR Station Protection Configuration ................................................................140 Fig. 13.7 Span Protection Switch.......................................................................................141 Fig. 13.8 RPR Topo Table .................................................................................................142 Fig. 13.9 RPR Client Port Config .......................................................................................143 Fig. 13.10 RPR WAN Port Config........................................................................................144 Fig. 13.11 Bandwidth Configuration.....................................................................................145 Fig. 13.12 Static MultiCast Configuration ............................................................................146 Fig. 13.13 Add/Modify Static MultiCast................................................................................147 Fig. 13.14 RPR Service Configuration.................................................................................148 Fig. 13.15 Add RPR Service................................................................................................149 Fig. 13.16 RPR Service Station Configuration ....................................................................149 Fig. 13.17 Rate Limit Pre-Configuration ..............................................................................150 Fig. 13.18 RPR Service Management .................................................................................151 Fig. 13.19 RPR Service Management- Query reslut ...........................................................152 Fig. 13.20 Service Detail......................................................................................................153 Fig. 13.21 Modify RPR Service............................................................................................154


12 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 13.22 RPR Service Station Configuration.................................................................... 154 Fig. 14.1 CC 1+1 Protection ............................................................................................. 156 Fig. 14.2 Equipment Protection Group Management ....................................................... 157 Fig. 14.3 EPG External Command ................................................................................... 158 Fig. 14.4 See detail of EPG .............................................................................................. 159 Fig. 14.5 Create EPG........................................................................................................ 159 Fig. 14.6 1: N Equipment Protection Group Management................................................ 160 Fig. 14.7 1: N EPG External Command............................................................................ 161 Fig. 14.8 See detail of 1: N EPG....................................................................................... 162 Fig. 14.9 Creat 1: N EPG.................................................................................................. 162 Fig. 14.10 SNCP Management ........................................................................................... 163 Fig. 14.11 View/Modify SNCP............................................................................................. 164 Fig. 14.12 Create SNCP ..................................................................................................... 165 Fig. 14.13 Delete SNCP...................................................................................................... 166 Fig. 14.14 SNCP Switch ..................................................................................................... 166 Fig. 14.15 MSP Management ............................................................................................. 167 Fig. 14.16 Create Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group ............................................ 168 Fig. 14.17 Delete MSP........................................................................................................ 168 Fig. 14.18 Confiramtion window.......................................................................................... 169 Fig. 14.19 MSP Property..................................................................................................... 169 Fig. 14.20 External Commands .......................................................................................... 170 Fig. 14.21 MS-SPRing Management .................................................................................. 170 Fig. 14.22 Set Ring Property............................................................................................... 171 Fig. 14.23 Warning Window................................................................................................ 171 Fig. 14.24 Create MS-SPRing and Link Configuration ....................................................... 172 Fig. 14.25 Set NEs in Ring.................................................................................................. 172 Fig. 14.26 Create Ring-Select Link..................................................................................... 172 Fig. 14.27 Create MS-SPRing Confirming.......................................................................... 173 Fig. 14.28 Create MS-SPRing Created .............................................................................. 173 Fig. 14.29 Ring Properties- Protection Details.................................................................... 174 Fig. 14.30 Ring Properties- Switch ..................................................................................... 175 Fig. 14.31 Ring Properties- Mapping .................................................................................. 177 Fig. 14.32 Ring Properties- Squelch................................................................................... 177 Fig. 14.33 View/Modify Node Squelch Information............................................................. 178 Fig. 14.34 Create Node Squelch Information ..................................................................... 179 Fig. 15.1 Change NE IP .................................................................................................... 180 Fig. 15.2 Configure Ethernet IP ........................................................................................ 180 Fig. 15.3 Port DCC Management...................................................................................... 181 Fig. 15.4 OSI Configuration .............................................................................................. 182 Fig. 15.5 OSI Configuration ............................................................................................. 183 Fig. 15.6 GRE Tunnel ....................................................................................................... 183 Fig. 15.7 Edit GRE Tunnel ............................................................................................... 184 Fig. 15.8 MGMT Port RIP Configuration........................................................................... 185 Fig. 15.9 IP Interface......................................................................................................... 186 Fig. 15.10 IP Static Route ................................................................................................... 187 Fig. 15.11 Edit IP Static Route............................................................................................ 188 Fig. 15.12 Add IP Static Route............................................................................................ 188 Fig. 15.13 IP Routing Table ................................................................................................ 189 Fig. 15.14 OSPF Submenu................................................................................................. 190 Fig. 15.15 OSPF General ................................................................................................... 190 Fig. 15.16 Edit OSPF General ............................................................................................ 191


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 13

Fig. 15.17 OSPF Area..........................................................................................................192 Fig. 15.18 Add OSPF Area ..................................................................................................193 Fig. 15.19 Edit OSPF Area ..................................................................................................194 Fig. 15.20 OSPF Interface ...................................................................................................195 Fig. 15.21 Edit OSPF Interface............................................................................................196 Fig. 15.22 OSPF Interface Metric ........................................................................................197 Fig. 15.23 OSPF Neighbor ..................................................................................................198 Fig. 15.24 Route Redistribution ...........................................................................................199 Fig. 16.1 PRBS Test Management ....................................................................................200 Fig. 16.2 PRBS Setting......................................................................................................201 Fig. 16.3 Loopback Test ....................................................................................................202 Fig. 16.4 Lookback Test Configure....................................................................................203 Fig. 16.5 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management..................................................................204 Fig. 16.6 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Set 1...............................................................................204 Fig. 16.7 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Set 2...............................................................................205 Fig. 16.8 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Set 3...............................................................................205 Fig. 16.9 LED Test .............................................................................................................205 Fig. 17.1 SDH Current Performance..................................................................................213 Fig. 17.2 Monitor Point Filter..............................................................................................214 Fig. 17.3 Select Terminal Point..........................................................................................215 Fig. 17.4 Edit Properties of Monitored Parameter .............................................................216 Fig. 17.5 Current SDH Performance (right-click menu).....................................................217 Fig. 17.6 Threshold Setting................................................................................................217 Fig. 17.7 Warning window .................................................................................................217 Fig. 17.8 SDH History Performance ..................................................................................219 Fig. 17.9 SDH Unavailiable Periods ..................................................................................220 Fig. 17.10 Select Terminal Point..........................................................................................220 Fig. 17.11 Edit Setting .........................................................................................................221 Fig. 17.12 Ethernet Current Statistics..................................................................................222 Fig. 17.13 Monitor Point Filter..............................................................................................224 Fig. 17.14 Select Port ..........................................................................................................224 Fig. 17.15 Edit Properties of Performance Monitor .............................................................225 Fig. 17.16 Current 5 Second Ethernet Statistics .................................................................226 Fig. 17.17 Select Port ..........................................................................................................227 Fig. 17.18 History Ethernet Statistics...................................................................................228 Fig. 17.19 Current Ethernet VLAN Statistics .......................................................................229 Fig. 17.20 Enable per VLAN Ethernet PM...........................................................................229 Fig. 17.21 Select Port and VLAN.........................................................................................230 Fig. 17.22 Ethernet VLAN Statistics ....................................................................................230 Fig. 17.23 Monitor Point Filter..............................................................................................231 Fig. 17.24 Select Port and VLAN.........................................................................................231 Fig. 17.25 5 Second Ethernet VLAN Performance..............................................................232 Fig. 17.26 Select Card, LAN/WAN, and Port.......................................................................233 Fig. 17.27 Current E1 Bit-Slip Performance ........................................................................234 Fig. 17.28 Monitor Point Filter..............................................................................................234 Fig. 17.29 Select Port ..........................................................................................................235 Fig. 17.30 Edit Properties of Performance Monitor .............................................................235 Fig. 17.31 Current E1 Bit Slip Performance(Right-click menu) ...........................................236 Fig. 17.32 Threshold Setting................................................................................................236 Fig. 17.33 History E1 Bit Slip Performance .........................................................................237 Fig. 17.34 PDH CRC Current Performance.........................................................................238


14 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 17.35 Monitor Point Filter............................................................................................. 239 Fig. 17.36 Select Port ......................................................................................................... 239 Fig. 17.37 Edit Properties of Performance Monitor............................................................. 240 Fig. 17.38 Current PDH CRC Performance (Right-click menu).......................................... 241 Fig. 17.39 Threshold Setting............................................................................................... 242 Fig. 17.40 History PDH CRC Performance......................................................................... 242 Fig. 17.41 Monitor Point Filter............................................................................................. 243 Fig. 17.42 Select Port ......................................................................................................... 243 Fig. 17.43 PDH CRC Unavailiable Periods......................................................................... 244 Fig. 17.44 Select Port ......................................................................................................... 244 Fig. 17.45 Edit Setting......................................................................................................... 245 Fig. 17.46 RPR Span Current PM....................................................................................... 246 Fig. 17.47 Monitor Point Filter............................................................................................. 247 Fig. 17.48 Select Span........................................................................................................ 248 Fig. 17.49 Edit Properties of Monitored Parameter ............................................................ 249 Fig. 17.50 RPR Span History Performance Value.............................................................. 249 Fig. 17.51 Select Parameter ............................................................................................... 250 Fig. 17.52 Select SPAN ...................................................................................................... 251 Fig. 17.53 Current RPR MAC Client Performance ............................................................. 251 Fig. 17.54 Monitor Point Filter............................................................................................. 252 Fig. 17.55 Select Client....................................................................................................... 253 Fig. 17.56 Edit Properties of Performance Monitoring........................................................ 253 Fig. 17.57 RPR MAC Client History Performance Value.................................................... 254 Fig. 17.58 Select Parameter ............................................................................................... 255 Fig. 17.59 Select Client....................................................................................................... 255 Fig. 18.1 Open Active Alarms from Main Menu................................................................ 257 Fig. 18.2 Open Active Alarms from Right-click Menu ....................................................... 258 Fig. 18.3 Alarm Count by Severity .................................................................................... 258 Fig. 18.4 Active Alarms ..................................................................................................... 259 Fig. 18.5 Alarm Detail ....................................................................................................... 260 Fig. 18.6 Clear Alarm ........................................................................................................ 260 Fig. 18.7 Alarm Search ..................................................................................................... 261 Fig. 18.8 Open History Alarms from Main Menu............................................................... 262 Fig. 18.9 Open History Alarms from Right-click Menu...................................................... 262 Fig. 18.10 History Alarms.................................................................................................... 262 Fig. 18.11 Alarm Search ..................................................................................................... 263 Fig. 18.12 Alarm Source Config.......................................................................................... 264 Fig. 18.13 Active Alarm Search Result ............................................................................... 264 Fig. 18.14 Print Setting ....................................................................................................... 265 Fig. 18.15 Report Alarms Preview ...................................................................................... 266 Fig. 18.16 Save File ............................................................................................................ 266 Fig. 18.17 Print Alarms ....................................................................................................... 267 Fig. 18.18 Print Alarms Preview.......................................................................................... 267 Fig. 18.19 Print Setup ......................................................................................................... 268 Fig. 18.20 Open Alarm Audio Configure from main menu.................................................. 268 Fig. 18.21 Audio Alarm Configuration................................................................................. 269 Fig. 18.22 Open Alarm Type Management from Main Menu ............................................. 269 Fig. 18.23 Alarm Type List Management............................................................................ 270 Fig. 18.24 Modify User Defined Severity of Alarm.............................................................. 270 Fig. 18.25 TP AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration ......................................................... 271 Fig. 18.26 Alarm Inhibit Configuration – for port ................................................................. 272


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 15

Fig. 18.27 Alarm Persistent Time Configuration..................................................................273 Fig. 18.28 Alarm Out Configuration .....................................................................................273 Fig. 18.29 MDI Configuration...............................................................................................274 Fig. 18.30 MDO Configuration .............................................................................................275 Fig. 18.31 Node Event Log ..................................................................................................276 Fig. 18.32 Event Search ......................................................................................................278 Fig. 18.33 Event Search Result ...........................................................................................279 Fig. 19.1 TP Multiplexing Structure....................................................................................280 Fig. 19.2 Query Result .......................................................................................................280 Fig. 19.3 Expanding Tree Graph .......................................................................................281 Fig. 19.4 Mapping AU4 to TU12 ........................................................................................281 Fig. 19.5 Result of Mapping...............................................................................................282 Fig. 19.6 Mapping TU12 to AU4 ........................................................................................282 Fig. 19.7 Cross-Connect Management Menu....................................................................283 Fig. 19.8 Cross-Connect Management..............................................................................283 Fig. 19.9 Create Cross-Connect ........................................................................................284 Fig. 19.10 Create Cross-Connect window...........................................................................285 Fig. 19.11 Three (3) Node Ring ...........................................................................................286 Fig. 19.12 Synchronization Management ............................................................................286 Fig. 19.13 Synchronization Management ............................................................................287 Fig. 19.14 Station Clock Setting ..........................................................................................287 Fig. 19.15 Timing Source Reference Properties .................................................................288 Fig. 19.16 Remove Timing Source Reference ....................................................................288 Fig. 19.17 System Clock......................................................................................................289 Fig. 19.18 Timing Results ....................................................................................................289 Fig. 19.19 Synchronization Management ............................................................................290 Fig. 19.20 Timing Source Reference Management.............................................................290 Fig. 19.21 Synchronization Management ............................................................................291 Fig. 19.22 Bridge Configuration Tab....................................................................................292 Fig. 19.23 Bridges Properties ..............................................................................................292 Fig. 19.24 LAN Port Property Configuration ........................................................................293 Fig. 19.25 WAN Port Configuration .....................................................................................294 Fig. 19.26 Bandwidth Management .....................................................................................295 Fig. 19.27 VLAN Management ............................................................................................296 Fig. 19.28 VLAN Configuration ............................................................................................296 Fig. 19.29 VLAN Management: Query Result .....................................................................297 Fig. 19.30 Create Cross-Connect ........................................................................................298 Fig. 19.31 Cross-Connect Management..............................................................................299 Fig. 19.32 Current SDH Performance Tab ..........................................................................300 Fig. 19.33 SDH Current Performance..................................................................................300 Fig. 19.34 Monitor Point Filter..............................................................................................301 Fig. 19.35 Select Terminal Point..........................................................................................302 Fig. 19.36 Monitor Point Filter..............................................................................................302 Fig. 19.37 SDH Current Performance..................................................................................303 Fig. 19.38 Point-to-point System .........................................................................................303 Fig. 19.39 Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group Management ...................................304 Fig. 19.40 Create Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group .............................................304 Fig. 19.41 Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group Management ...................................305 Fig. 19.42 SNCP Example...................................................................................................305 Fig. 19.43 SNCP Management............................................................................................306 Fig. 19.44 Create and Config SNCP....................................................................................307


16 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 19.45 SNCP Protection of NE A .................................................................................. 307 Fig. 19.46 SNCP Switch ..................................................................................................... 308 Fig. 19.47 MS-SPRing Management .................................................................................. 309 Fig. 19.48 Set Ring Property............................................................................................... 309 Fig. 19.49 Warning Window................................................................................................ 309 Fig. 19.50 Create Ring........................................................................................................ 310 Fig. 19.51 Select Link Port.................................................................................................. 310 Fig. 19.52 Create Ring – NEs and links Successful Confugured ....................................... 311 Fig. 19.53 Confirm to add protection .................................................................................. 311 Fig. 19.54 MS-SPRing List.................................................................................................. 311 Fig. 19.55 Equipment Protection Group Management ....................................................... 312 Fig. 19.56 Create EPG........................................................................................................ 312 Fig. 19.57 Create EPG – Successfully ............................................................................... 313 Fig. 19.58 Enable EPG ....................................................................................................... 313 Fig. 19.59 Enable EPG – Successfully ............................................................................... 313 Fig. 19.60 Create EPG – Finish.......................................................................................... 313 Fig. 19.61 RPR Service Configuration................................................................................ 314 Fig. 19.62 Add RPR Service ............................................................................................... 315 Fig. 19.63 RPR Service Station Configuration.................................................................... 315 Fig. 19.64 Rate Limiting Pre-Configuration......................................................................... 316 Fig. 19.65 Add RPR Service Station – Finish ..................................................................... 317 Fig. 19.66 RPR Service Management ................................................................................ 317 Fig. 19.67 RPR Service Management – Query Result ....................................................... 318 Fig. 19.68 Delete RPR Service – Confirm Window ............................................................ 318


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 17

Tables Tab. 2.1 Card Position of hiT_7060_4.1............................................................................22 Tab. 2.2 4× STM-1E (W/P) allowable slots........................................................................22 Tab. 2.3 3× E3/DS3 (W/P) allowable slots ........................................................................23 Tab. 3.1 Feature List..........................................................................................................25 Tab. 4.1 Minimum Hardware Requirement of TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT...........26 Tab. 8.1 Main Menu Structure ...........................................................................................48 Tab. 8.2 SDH Card Submenu Structure ............................................................................48 Tab. 8.3 CC Card Submenu Structure...............................................................................49 Tab. 8.4 SC Card Submenu Structure...............................................................................49 Tab. 8.5 Ethernet Card Submenu Structure- Ethernet/Tcard............................................50 Tab. 8.6 Ethernet Card Submenu Structure- Ethernet/L2 card .........................................50 Tab. 8.7 RPR Card Submenu Structure ............................................................................50 Tab. 10.1 Main Shelf Properties ..........................................................................................66 Tab. 10.2 The third section of the NE Software Management Window...............................73 Tab. 11.1 Card Identification................................................................................................80 Tab. 11.2 CF related events and alarms .............................................................................80 Tab. 11.3 Port Properties.....................................................................................................82 Tab. 11.4 Port Status...........................................................................................................84 Tab. 11.5 Port Status-advanced..........................................................................................85 Tab. 11.6 Value of Parameters for SFP ..............................................................................86 Tab. 11.7 TP Management Parameters ..............................................................................94 Tab. 11.8 Tributary (Trib#) to KLM to Timeslot (TS#) Numbers Mapping ...........................97 Tab. 11.9 Timing Source Management Time IN Window Parameters ..............................100 Tab. 12.1 Card Identification..............................................................................................107 Tab. 12.2 Backplane Bandwidth of the card......................................................................107 Tab. 12.3 Bandwidth limitations for Ethernet cards and WAN ports .................................120 Tab. 12.4 Type of VCs for Ethernet cards .........................................................................122 Tab. 14.1 SNCP Properties ...............................................................................................164 Tab. 16.1 PRBS Test Pattern ............................................................................................201 Tab. 17.1 Regenerator Section SES threshold xx% (for BIP-8)........................................208 Tab. 17.2 MS Far End Errored Blocks Size- STM-16........................................................208 Tab. 17.3 Defects Resulting in a Near-end Severely Errored Second ..............................208 Tab. 17.4 Defects resulting in a Far-end Severely Errored Second..................................208 Tab. 17.5 Multiplex Section SES threshold xx% (For BIP-1) ............................................209 Tab. 17.6 Defects Resulting in a Near-end Severely Errored Second ..............................209 Tab. 17.7 Defects Resulting in a Far-end Severely Errored Second ................................209 Tab. 17.8 Path Overhead Section SES Threshold xx% (For BIP-2, BIP-8) ......................210 Tab. 17.9 PM Management Functions ..............................................................................213 Tab. 17.10 Default Value and Value Range for a Fixed 15-minute Period .........................218 Tab. 17.11 Default value and Value Range for a Fixed 24-hour Period..............................218 Tab. 17.12 Maximum Records number of History Performance .........................................219 Tab. 17.13 Primary Ethernet PM Function ..........................................................................222 Tab. 17.14 Frame Size Ranges for Different Parameters ...................................................223 Tab. 17.15 PM Management Functions ..............................................................................238 Tab. 17.16 Frame Size Range for Parameters....................................................................248 Tab. 18.1 Active Alarms Information..................................................................................259 Tab. 18.2 LED Status ........................................................................................................265 Tab. 18.3 AIS/RDI Alarm Tree Nodes Selection Logic......................................................272 Tab. 18.4 Management Events..........................................................................................277


18 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Tab. 18.5 Hardware Events .............................................................................................. 277 Tab. 18.6 Software Events................................................................................................ 278


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 19

1 Notes on this Documentation

1.1 Customer Documentation The Customer Documentation of the SURPASS hiT 7060 comprises the following descriptions and manuals:

• Technical Manual

The Technical Manual gives an overview of the application, performance features, interfaces, and functions of the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060. It also contains the most important technical data.

The Technical Manual does not contain any instructions to operate the product.

• Installation and Testing Manual

The Installation and Test Manual ITMN contains instructions on mounting, connecting, and commissioning the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060, as well as connecting and commissioning the LCT operation terminals.

• Troubleshooting Manual The Troubleshooting Manual provides information about the supported alarm list and troubleshooting procedures for the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060.

• TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT User Manual The LCT User Manual provides information about the LCT (features, configuration, installation, etc.) and how to operate, monitor, and maintain the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 using the Element Manager software (Application Software) running on the LCT.

Besides the LCT User Manual, the Online Help provided for the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT software is an extremely useful reference for the operator.

1.2 Complementary Documents In addition to the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 customer documentation listed in Chapter 1.1, there is further documentation:

• TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 Release Note

This document identifies the specific version of the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 and provides information on HW, SW, LCT components and the limitations of the release as well as important notes concerning the customer documentation.

ii


20 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

1.3 Symbols Used in the Customer Documentation

1.3.1 Symbol for Warnings

This symbol identifies notes which, if ignored, can result in personal injury or in permanent damage to the equipment.

1.3.2 Symbols for Notes

This symbol identifies notes providing information which extends beyond the immediate context.

This symbol identifies cross references to other chapters in this manual or cross references to other manuals. This symbol refers to the online help system of the Element Manager software.

1.3.3 Symbols for Menu Displays and Text Inputs Menu options from pop-up menus or inputs to be made by the user (texts, commands) are displayed consecutively in their hierarchical sequence in pointed brackets:

<Menu> <Menu item> <Command text> <Parameter> etc.

1.4 Notes on Licensed Software This documentation refers to software products which were taken over from other companies as licenses.

Should problems arise, the user should contact Siemens AG as the licensee and not the relevant licenser.

Help

ii

!!


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 21

2 Introduction TNMS-M series products are network management systems which are used to manage and maintain SURPASS MSTP network elements.

The TNMS-M series network management system products include the TNMS-M LCT and the TNMS-M. (See Fig. 2.1)

Other Vendor’s OSS

TNMS-MNCI

SURPASS NETWORK ELEMENTs

(hiT 7060)

TNMS-M LCTSNMP

SNMP

CORBA/TMF814

Fig. 2.1 TNMS-M Series Products

TNMS-M LCT (Local Craft Terminal) provides an NE level TNMS-M based management function and GUI. One TNMS-M LCT application can only connect and manage one NE at one time. The interface between TNMS-M LCT and NE is TNMS-M based. Different types of network elements correspond to different types of LCTs, which are mainly used for on-site management and maintenances.

TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT is an element management system for a single NE, which is designed to provide comprehensive fault, configuration, and performance management functions for the SURPASS hiT 7060 product line.

Note: The latest 7060 R4.x LCT can manage all old 7060 R4.x NEs, but can not manage any 7060 R3.x NEs (4.x, 3.x refer to release versions, such as 4.0, 3.3, etc).

ii


22 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Slots

Cards

SC CC 1 to 2

LC1 to2

LC 3

LC 4

LC5 to6

LC7 to8

LC9 to10

LC 11

EC1

EC2

EC3

EC 4

EC 5

EC 6

PWR1 to 2

FAN

SC √ PWR √ FAN √ CC + 1xSTM-16/4

√

1xSTM-16 √ 4xSTM- 4 √1 √1 √ 4xSTM-1 √ √ √ 2xSTM-1 √ √ √ √ √ 4xSTM-1E (W/P)

√ √ √

4xSTM-1E EC

√ √ √

3xE3/DS3 (W/P)

√ √ √ √ √

3xE3/DS3 EC √ √ √ √ 63xE1/R (W/P) 2

√ √

63xE1/R EC 2 √ √ √ 2xGE+8FE/AE √3 √3 √ 2xGE+8FE RPRE

√

2xGE/T √3 √3 √ 8xFE/T √ √ √ √ √ 6xFE/L2 √ √ √ √ √ OA √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Tab. 2.1 Card Position of hiT_7060_4.1

Note1: while 4xSTM-4 card is used in LC1, LC2, LC5 or LC6 slot, only first port is available, that means it could be seem as 1xSTM-4.

Note2: the 63xE1 (W/P) and 63xE1 EC cards are not supported in hiT 7060 release 4.0 and further release.

Note3: while 2xGE/T and 2xGE+8FE/AE cards are used in these slots, only 4xVC4 bandwidth could be supported for each card.

Note4: 4xSTM-1E and 3xE3/DS3 cards can only be plugged through one of the following ways:

4xSTM-1E Protection Pair 1

(3 slots) Protection Pair 2

(3 slots) Board Name Allowable Slots Allowable Slots

4× STM-1E EC EC2 EC4 4× STM-1E (W/P) LC5 LC6 LC1 LC2

Tab. 2.2 4× STM-1E (W/P) allowable slots

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 23

3xE3/DS3 Protection Pair

1 (3 slots)

Protection Pair 2

(3 slots)

Protection Pair 3

(3 slots)

Protection Pair 4

(3 slots) Board Name

Allowable Slots Allowable Slots Allowable Slots Allowable Slots3× E3/DS3 EC EC5 EC4 EC2 EC1 3× E3/DS3 (W/P)

LC9 LC10 LC1 LC2 LC5 LC6 LC3 LC4

Tab. 2.3 3× E3/DS3 (W/P) allowable slots


24 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

3 Features

The main features of TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT features are listed in Tab. 3.1.

Feature Description

Java-Based User Interface • Java-based user interface to connect NEs • A Chassis View showing the front faceplate of the

equipment • Color-coded LEDs to indicate NE status

Consistency and Data Synchronization

• Uploads data from the actual NE to update the management information for the NE in the LCT

• Ensures all status and data in the LCT are consistent with the actual NE

Network Element Control • Enables NE software updates to be downloaded from the LCT

• Redundant images of the embedded software are stored in an NE, one active and one backup which can be switched and activated by the LCT

• NE warm reboot and cold reboot can be controlled by the LCT

Configuration Management • View/synchronize/delete/modify Circuit-pack attributes

• View/synchronize/modify port attributes • TP configuration and management, including

viewing/synchronizing/modifying TP attributes, and TP multiplexing structure configuration

• SDH Cross-Connect configuration and management• Timing configuration and management, including

selecting the timing reference for system clock, modifying/viewing timing reference of the NE’s system clock, and configuring the timing reference for station clock

• Virtual concatenation configuration and management • LCAS configuration • Ethernet VLAN configuration • Ethernet Class of Service configuration • Rapid spanning trees management • Rate limiting configuration for the Ethernet port • Broadcast storm control • Multicast management • IP route configuration • OSPF parameters configuration • OSI-Light parameters configuration

Protection and Redundancy • Supports Cross-Connect/Timing 1+1 protection management

• Supports Equipment Protection management for E1, E3/DS3, and STM-1 Electrical cards

• Supports MS-SPRing protection management • Supports MSP protection management • Supports SNCP/I protection management • Supports Ethernet RSTP protection management


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 25

Feature Description

Performance Management • Supports monitored performance TPs/ports and parameters selection.

• Supports current performance management • Supports historical performance management

Maintenance • Loopback Configuration for testing • LED test • PRBS Test Maintenance • AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management

Fault Management • Collects, displays, and manages SURPASS hiT 7060 fault messages (including NE, card, port and TP related)

• Supports color coded alarms to indicate alarm severity level

• Supports active alarm synchronization Event Management • Supports NE related event management

Tab. 3.1 Feature List


26 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

4 Hardware Configuration The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT software can run on the following Operation System:

• Microsoft Windows based operation system on a desktop or laptop PC.

The minimum hardware requirements of TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT are listed in Tab. 4.1.

Configuration Hardware Requirement

Windows-Based Computer • 1.6 GHz Pentium-4 Processor • 512M RAM • 1 × 20GB Hard Disk • TP Ethernet 10/100BASE-T Networking Port • Graphic Card with 1024 × 768 resolution (75Hz

refresh for Desktop; 60-Hz refresh for Notebook)

• Color Monitor

Tab. 4.1 Minimum Hardware Requirement of TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 27

5 Software Configuration The following operation system and software package are required to install and run the TNMS-M SUPASS hiT 7060 LCT.

• Microsoft Windows based operation system

− Windows XP Professional operation system

− Windows 2000 Professional operation system

• The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT software


28 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

6 Installation

6.1 Route Configuration The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT manages NEs based on TCP/IP addresses. Therefore, the user must set a static route to enable the LCT system to find the NE. Before setting the route, ensure that the console port and the MGMT port of the user’s computer are connected with the peer ports of SURPASS hiT 7060.

Note: The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT only supports NE management though the MGMT port.

1. Click <Start> <Programs> <Accessories> <Communications> <Hyper Terminal> to open the <New Connection: Hyper Terminal> window. (See Fig. 6.1)

Fig. 6.1 Open Hyper Terminal

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 29

2. In the <Connection Description> window, enter the user name in the <Name> field and click <OK>.

Fig. 6.2 Hyper Terminal--Connection Description

3. In the <Connect To> window, choose <COM1> (or the computer’s connected console port) in the <Connect using> drop-down menu and click <OK>.

Fig. 6.3 Hyper Terminal--Connect To


30 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

4. In the <COM1 Properties> window, click <Restore Defaults> and click <OK>.

Fig. 6.4 Hyper Terminal--COM1 Properties

5. Press the <Enter> key several times, and the CLI interface window will appear. (See Fig. 6.5) Input the user name and the password, and then press <Enter>. The user name is <root> and the password is left blank.

Fig. 6.5 CLI Window--Welcome to Login


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 31

6. The Main Menu will appear. (See Fig. 6.6)

Fig. 6.6 Main Menu

7. User Table

Press <U> from the Main Menu and the User Table will appear. (See Fig. 6.7). The User Table enables the user to add/delete/modify the user information.

Fig. 6.7 User Table


32 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

8. Press <E> from the User Table to edit a given user.

Fig. 6.8 Edit a Given User

9. IP Address Configuration

Press <I> from the Main Menu to configure the node IP address, the management port IP address, the management port subnet mask, and the default gateway for the management port.

The user can select options 1 to 4 to configure the special IP addresses based on his/her needs.

Fig. 6.9 IP Address Configuration


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 33

10. Click <Start> <Programs> <Accessories> <Command Prompt> to open the <Command Prompt> window, and then use the <route add [destination IP address] mask [netmask] [gateway IP address] -p> command to add the static route information. For example, enter the command <route add 192.168.16.243 mask 255.255.255.255 192.168.12.243 –p> to add the static route information into the user’s computer. This means the added route’s IP address is 192.168.16.243, the mask is 255.255.255.255, and the gateway is 192.168.12.243. (See Fig. 6.10)

Note: The user can use the <route /help> command to get more information about the <route> command.

Fig. 6.10 Add Static Route Information

6.2 Installing the LCT software package After selecting the SURPASS hiT series products, Siemens post sales engineers and technical support technicians will help to complete selection and installation of the hardware and software based on requirements. A TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT installation CD will be provided. Install the LCT software package from the provided CD using the program’s wizard mode on any qualified operating system.

Note: LCT`s upgrade procedure do not allow overlap installation.

An example of how to install the LCT software package is given below.

Double-click the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT setup file (for example: TNMS_M_SURPASS_hiT7060_R41_setup.exe). A welcome screen will appear. (See Fig. 6.11) Then click <Next>.

ii

ii


34 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 6.11 Setup Wizard Welcome Screen

1. In the <License Agreement> window, choose <I accept the agreement>, and click <Next> to continue.

Fig. 6.12 License Agreement

2. Accept the default destination location, and click <Next> to continue. (See Fig. 6.13)

Note: The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT software will be installed by default in the %SystemDrive%\Siemens\hiT7060_41 folder. (%SystemDrive% specifies the drive letter of ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 35

the hard disk drive containing the Windows operating system.) For example: If Windows is installed in Drive C, the software will be installed in the C:\Siemens\hiT7060_41 folder.

Fig. 6.13 Select Destination Location

3. Accept the default Start Menu folder location, and click <Next> to continue.

Fig. 6.14 Select Start Menu Folder

If user change the default folder path, don’t input 2 continuous SPACEs in install dictionary/folder name, otherwise some function of system will run abnormally.


36 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

4. In the <Select Additional Tasks> window, there are two options: 1) <Create a desktop icon> and 2) <Create a Quick Launch icon>. Both additional icons are selected by default. Click <Next> after selecting the preferred choice.

Fig. 6.15 Select Additional Tasks

5. After reviewing installation choices, click <Install> to proceed or <Back> to go back and make changes.

Fig. 6.16 Ready to Install


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 37

6. Next the software is installed. (See Fig. 6.17)

Fig. 6.17 Installing

7. If at any of the 7 steps above you wish to stop the installation process, click <Cancel>, and the <Exit Setup> window will appear. (See Fig. 6.18) Click <Yes> to exit setup. Click <No> to continue the installation process.

Fig. 6.18 Exit Setup


38 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

8. Click <Finish> to finish the installation. It is recommended that do not select the option <Launch TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 4.1 LCT>.

Fig. 6.19 Completing the Setup

6.3 Uninstalling the LCT Software Package 1. Click <Start>, select <Programs>, select <TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 4.1 LCT>, and click <Uninstall TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 4.1 LCT>.

Fig. 6.20 Uninstall TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT

2. Select <Yes> to uninstall TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 4.1 LCT. (See Fig. 6.21)

Fig. 6.21 Confirm Window for Uninstall

3. If <Yes> is selected, an Uninstall Status window will appear. (Fig. 6.22)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 39

Fig. 6.22 Uninstall Status

4. After the uninstalling is complete, a confirm window box will appear. Click <OK> to finish the uninstall process. Some items could not be removed automatically, but can be removed manually from the installation folder (%SystemDrive%\Siemens by default).

Fig. 6.23 Completing Uninstalling Process


40 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

7 Starting and Shutting down TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT

7.1 Starting TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT After the SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT software is installed, there are two ways to start TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT:

Option 1:

If the <Create a desktop icon> option is selected during the installation process, a <TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 4.1 LCT> icon will appear on Desktop. (See Fig. 7.1) Double-click the icon to start the LCT program.

Fig. 7.1 Desktop Icon

Option 2:

1. Select <Start> <Programs> <TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 4.1 LCT>, and click the <TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 4.1 LCT> icon to start the LCT program. (See Fig. 7.2)

Fig. 7.2 Start LCT from Start Menu

Option 3:

<TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 4.1 LCT> can also be started from quick lanch icon. (See Fig. 7.3) Double-click the icon to start the LCT program.

Fig. 7.3 Start LCT from quick lanch icon

A window will appear. (See Fig. 7.4).


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 41

Fig. 7.4 LCT Login Window1

Input the NE IP address, then click <OK> to continue, or click <Exit> to quit.

Then the LCT login window will start. (See Fig. 7.5) Input LCT’s Login Name, Password, NE’s Node IP Address which can be communicated with and LCT IP Adress. Then click <Connect>.

Fig. 7.5 LCT Login Window2

For example, the user can login TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT using account:

Login Name: root

Password: public

The password can be changed in the LCT program.


42 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Note:

I. If the Network adapter of the computer has more than one IP addresses, the user can choose LCT trap IP address from the drop-down menu. (See Fig. 7.5)

II. If there are multiple IP address configured on the PC, the IP address used as LCT trap IP should be different from the one used as TNMS-M server IP. If the same IP address is used and TNMS-M has run already, the LCT program can't be started scuccessfully

III. The NE will disconnect from the LCT program when the NE is restarted. The LCT program will re-connect to the NE automatically after the NE is restarted. To connect manually, the user needs to wait at least 40s after the NE is restarted.

IV. The NE can’t be managed by the TNMS server and the LCT program on the same host at the same time.

V. There is no READ/WRITE access control policy implemented between TNMS-M and the LCT program.

2. After successfully connecting to the NE, the following GUI will appear. (See Fig. 7.6)

Fig. 7.6 LCT GUI

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 43

7.2 Shutting Down TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT There are two ways to shut down TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT:

Option 1: Click the <X> at top right of the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT window.

Option 2: From the main menu, click <System> <Exit>.

A confirm window will appear. Click <Yes> to confirm the shutdown request.


44 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

8 Main Interface Features

8.1 Main Window The main window (See Fig. 8.1) consists of the following elements:

• Title Bar

• Main Menu Bar

• Work Area

Title Bar

Main Menu Bar

Work Area

Fig. 8.1 Main Window

8.1.1 Title Bar The title bar is located at the top of the main window (See Fig. 8.1)

The title bar contains:

Leftmost, a special window symbol.

The type designation of the network element.

8.1.2 Main Menu Bar The main menu bar is located at the top of the main window, below the title bar (See Fig. 8.1). It contains the main menu.

The drop-down menu items will be changed when different object (for example: an NE, a card, or a port) is selected in chassis view.

Before the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT is connected to the NE, the main menu bar only shows four drop-down menus: <System>, <Security>, <Windows>, and <Help>.

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 45

System Working with the software Connect Allow the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT to connect with NE

Audio Alarm Config Configure the audio alarm

Exit Close the main window of the NE application software, thus ending the session

Security Working with the software Account Management Manage user accounts Change Password Change current password of LCT Lock Screen Lock the screen Lock Screen Config Set lock screen information

Windows Working with the software Minimize All Minimize all the windows. It is greyed out. Maximize All Maximize all the windows. It is greyed out.

Help Working with the software Help Launch the Online Help About Show the information about TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT

Note: After the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT is connected to the NE, the main menu bar shows ten drop-down menus: <System>, <Security>,<Windows>,<Help>, <Configuration>, <DCN>, <RPR>, <Fault>, <Performance>, and <Maintenance>.

System Working with the software Disconnect Disconnect LCT from NE Audio Alarm Config Manage all audio alarm, including melody type and play times Exit Close the main window of the NE application software, thus ending the

session

Security Working with the software Account Management Manage user accounts Change Password Change current password of LCT Lock Screen Lock screen Lock Screen Config Set information about lock screen

Windows Selecting the view for the open windows SURPASS hiT 7060

Chassis View List of all the currently-open windows; the selected window (in the foreground) is indicated by the tick

Minimize All Minimize all opened windows Maximize All Maximize all windows

Help Working with the software Help Launch the Online Help About Show the information about TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT

Configuration Showing system options NE Manage NE

ii


46 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

NE Property Configuration

View and modify the NE properties

Synchronize NE Synchronize NE and LCT databases Warm Reboot NE Restart the NE under the LCT system (software reboot) Cold Reboot NE Restart the NE and will cause traffic loss (hardware reboot) Shutdown NE Safely close the NE TP Configuration View and modify all TP Properties TP Multiplexing Structure View and modify the TP construction Cross-Connection

Management Manage all cross- connections in the NE

Synchronization Management

Set and manage the timing references

CC 1+ 1 Protection Manage CC 1+1 Protection 1+1 Equipment Protection

Management Create and manage 1+1equipment protection

1:N Equipment Protection Management

Create and manage 1:N equipment protection

MSP Management Create and manage MS Protection MS-SPRing Management Create and manage MS-SPRing SNCP Management Create and manage SNCP NE FTP Configuration Set server address NE Mib management Manage the NE MIB database NE Software Management Update, back up, and switch NE software NE Time Setting View and change NE time setting NE Trap Destination

Configure Show and manage all IP addresses of PCs on which TNMS-M/LCT are running. Currently managed NEs will send trap to all those TNMS-M/LCT

Alarm Out Configuration Set system out alarm on or off EOW Configuration Manage the EOW data MDI/MDO Configuration Set the MDI/MDO alarm reporting options NE Resource Usage

Statistics View the cards and ports in Mainboard and their usages. Data cards are not listed.

Refresh Chassis Refresh the chassis view.

DCN Configuring Data Communication Network Change NE IP Change NE’s IP Change Ethernet IP Change NE’s Ethernet IP DCC Management Configure the data communication channel’s setting GRE Tunnel Query and set the GRE Tunnel’s configuration MGMT Port RIP

Configuration Enable or disable the RIP configuration of the MGMT port.

IP Route Configuraion Configure the IP Route Attributes IP Interface View and configure the IP interface parameters IP Static Route View and configure the IP static route IP RoutingTable View and configure the IP routing table OSI Configuration Configure the OSI setting OSFP Configure the OSPF setting OSFP General View the basic information about OSFP OSFP Areas Contain information reguarding various areas OSFP Interfaces Describe the interface from the viewpoint of OSFP OSFP IF Metrics Describe the metrics to be advertised for a specified interface OSFP Neighbors Describe all neighbors in the locality of the subject router Route Redistribution Share routing information between RIP and OSFP protocol.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 47

Fault Managing Alarm Active Alarms Display current alarms occur on NE/Card/Port according to managed object

selected currently History Alarms Display history alarms occur on NE/Card/Port Events Display all events about the operation

Note: Only when neither a card nor a port in chassis is highlighted, would this menu item be displayed

AIS/RDI Alarm Configuration

Inhibit special TP’s AIS/RDI Alarm

Alarm Type List Management

Manage alarm type

Alarm Inhibit Configuration

Inhibit specific NE/special card or port’s alarm

Alarm Persistent Time Configuraion

Set alarm persistent time.

Performance Viewing the status of NE Current SDH

Performance View and manage current SDH performance

History SDH Performance

View and manage history SDH performance

SDH UnAvailable Periods

Set SDH Unavailable Periods

Current Ethernet Performance

View and manage current Ethernet performance

History Ethernet Performance

View and manage history Ethernet performance

Current Ethernet VLAN Statistics

View and manage current Ethernet VLAN performance

History Ethernet VLAN Statistic

View and manage history Ethernet VLAN performance

5 Second Ethernet Performance

View and manage 5 Second Ethernet performance

5 Second Ethernet VLAN Performance

View and manage current 5 Second Ethernet VLAN performance

Current E1 Bit Slip Performance

View and manage current E1 Bit Slip performance

History E1 Bit Slip Performance

View and manage history E1 Bit Slip performance

Current PDH CRC Performance

View and manage current PDH CRC performance

History PDH CRC Performance

View and manage history PDH CRC performance

PDH CRC UnAvailable Periods

Set PDH CRC Unavailable Periods

Current RPR Span Performance

View and manage current RPR Span performance

History RPR Span View and manage historyRPR Span performance

RPR Configuring RPR functions RPR Service

Configuration Configure RPR Service

RPR Service Management

Manage RPR Service


48 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Performance Current RPR MAC Client

Performance View and manage current RPR MAC Client performance

History RPR MAC Client Performance

View and manage history RPR MAC Client performance

Maintenance Working with the maintenance test AIS/RDI Insertion Test

Management Perform and manage AIS/RDI insertion test

Loopback Test Management

Perform and manage Loop-back test

PRBS Test Management Perform and manage PRBS test LED Test Perform LED test

Tab. 8.1 Main Menu Structure

8.1.3 Work Area This range of the main window (See Fig. 8.1) shows all the windows which have just been opened.

All windows within the work area can be opened or closed without the application software ending (function of Windows).

In the Alarm Count area, all current alarms are collected and the numbers are listed by severity and category.

8.2 Submenus (with Right Mouse Button Click) The menu sequence which is described here depends on the selected card.

8.2.1 SDH Card After selecting the STM card, click right button.

Card Property Configuration

Open Card Properties window

Synchronize Card Open Synchronize window Active Alarms View and manage active alarms History Alarms View and manage history alarms Cold Reboot Card Restart card Delete Card Delete the card

Tab. 8.2 SDH Card Submenu Structure

8.2.2 CC Card After selecting the CC card, click right button.

CC<CC(H25L10)>

Card Property Configuration Open Card Properties window Synchronize Card Open Synchronize window Active Alarms View and manage active alarms History Alarms View and manage history alarms Cold Reboot Card Restart card


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 49

CC_LC<1×STM-16(4)> Card Property Configuration Open Card Properties window Synchronize Card Open Synchronize window Active Alarms View and manage active alarms History Alarms View and manage history alarms Cold Reboot Card Restart card

CC(Card) 1+1 Protection Manage CC 1+1 Protection Cross-Connect Management Open Cross Connection Management window Synchronization Management Open Synchronization Management window Delete Card Delete the card

Tab. 8.3 CC Card Submenu Structure

8.2.3 SC Card After selecting the SC card, click right button.

Card Property Configuration


Synchronize Card Open Synchronize window Active Alarms View and manage active alarms History Alarms View and manage history alarms Warm Reboot Card Restart card under the TNMS-M system (software reboot) Cold Reboot Card Restart card and the traffic will be lost (hardware reboot) Delete Card Delete the card

Tab. 8.4 SC Card Submenu Structure

Note:

- Warm rebooting SC card will cause the NE offline.

- Cold rebooting card will cause the traffic loss and cold rebooting SC card will cause the NE offline.

- When there is FPGA upgrade in SC card only, the user should only reboot the SC card, rather than reboot the whole system. Otherwise the whole system’s traffic will be interrupted.

8.2.4 Ethernet Card

After selecting the Ethernet card, click right button, the maximum main menu will be show as the table below.

The Ethernet menu structure will be different when the user selects an Ethernet/L2 card and Ethernet/T card.

For an Ethernet/T card: Card Property Configuration


Synchronize Card Open Synchronize window LAN Ports Property Configuration

View and modify the properties of LAN Port

WAN Ports Property Configuration

View and modify the properties of WAN Port

WAN Ports TP Structure

View and modify TP Structure of WAN Port

ii


50 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Active Alarms View and manage active alarms History Alarms View and manage history alarms Cold Reboot Card Restart card and the traffic will be lost (hardware reboot) Delete Card Delete the card

Tab. 8.5 Ethernet Card Submenu Structure- Ethernet/Tcard

For an Ethernet/L2 card: Card Property Configuration


Synchronize Card Open Synchronize window ACL Configuration View and modify the Access Control List of a Ethernet card Bridge Configuration Configure bridge properties VLAN Management Configure VLAN configurations LAN Ports Property Configuration

View and modify the properties of LAN Port

WAN Ports Property Configuration

View and modify the properties of WAN Port

WAN Ports TP Structure

View and modify TP Structure of WAN Port

IGMP Snooping Snoop IGMP RSTP Configuration View and modify the RSTP properties of a Ethernet card Static MAC Address Configuration

Configure Static MAC Address of a Ethernet card

Static Multicast Configuration

View and modify the Static Multicast of a Ethernet card

Active Alarms View and manage active alarms History Alarms View and manage history alarms Cold Reboot Card Restart card and the traffic will be lost (hardware reboot) Delete Card Delete the card

Tab. 8.6 Ethernet Card Submenu Structure- Ethernet/L2 card

8.2.5 RPR Card After selecting the RPR card, click right button.

Card Property Configuration Open Card Properties window Synchronize Card Open Synchronize window RPR Client Ports Property Configuration

Configure RPR Client Ports Property

RPR WAN Ports Property Configuration

Configure RPR WAN Ports Property

RPR Static Multicast Configuration

Configure RPR Multicast

RPR Station Configuration Configure RPR station RPR Topology Information View the RPR topology information Active Alarms View and manage active alarms History Alarms View and manage history alarms Cold Reboot Card Restart Card Delete Card Delete the card

Tab. 8.7 RPR Card Submenu Structure


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 51

9 Security Management The <Security> menu provides an entrance to manage the security of the system. (See Fig. 9.1)

Fig. 9.1 Security Menu

9.1 Account Management User Account Management helps to control the security of the system. Correct setup can get rid of many unexpected system errors and keep the systems running safely.

To open User Account Management:

Select <Security> <Account Management> from the main menu. The <Account Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 9.2)

Fig. 9.2 Account Management

9.1.1 User

To add a user account, select <File> <Add User>.

The <Create New User> window will pop up. (See Fig. 9.3)


52 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 9.3 Create New User

Fill in the <User Login Name>, <User Password> and <Repeat Password> blanks for a new user. Select groups that this new user belongs to.

Check the expiry time. Then click <Create User> to add this user. The new user name will appear beneath the Account tree. Click <Cancel> to withdraw all operations.

Here, the user named <core_administrator> is created. In the left panel, select the corresponding user. The properties of this user will appear in the right panel (See Fig. 9.4)

Select corresponding tab to view and modify <Member of Groups for core_administrator>, <User Profile for core_administrator>, <Permitted Operations for core_administrator> and <Operation Logs for core_administrator>.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 53

Fig. 9.4 New User Added View

In the <Member of Groups for core_administrator> tab: All the groups that this user belongs to are listed in this tab. (See Fig. 9.4) Here, user core_administrator belongs to the group: Administration.

Click <Setting Groups> to add or remove this user from a group. (See Fig. 9.5)

Fig. 9.5 Select Groups

Select the group in the left and click “>>” to add the user to this group. Select the group in the right and click “<<” to remove a user from this group.


54 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

In the <User Profile for core_administrator> tab: The status, user account and password expiry of this user are listed in this tab. (See Fig. 9.6)

Fig. 9.6 User Profile

Click <Modify User Profile> to set the user profile. (See Fig. 9.7)

Fig. 9.7 Setting User Profile


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 55

Configure the user’s status, Account expiry, and Password expiry. Click <OK> to confirm the modification or <Cancel> to quit.

In the <Permitted Operations for core_administrator> tab: All the operations permitted to this user are listed in this tab. (See Fig. 9.8)

Fig. 9.8 Permitted Operations for User

Note: The permitted operations for user cannot be changed in this window. To change the permitted operations for a user, the operator should configure the permitted operations for group which the user belongs to. (Refer to Chapter 9.1.2)

In the <Operation Logs for core_administrator> tab: All of the operations a specific user has done are listed in this tab. (See Fig. 9.9)

Fig. 9.9 Operation Logs for User

ii


56 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Click <Clear Operation Logs> to clear the whole operation history.

To delete a user:

Select the user in the left panel.

Right click and select <Remove User>. (See Fig. 9.10)

Fig. 9.10 Remove User

Confirm in the warning window to delete this user.(See Fig. 9.11)

Fig. 9.11 Confirmation Window

Click <Yes> to delete the selected user.

Click <No> to cancel the operation.

Note: The root user can not be deleted.

To change a user’s password:

Select the corresponding user in the left panel.

Right click and select <Reset Password>. Input the new password in the pop up window. (See Fig. 9.12)

Fig. 9.12 Reset Password

Click <Reset Password> to confirm the change, and <Cancel> to quit without change.

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 57

9.1.2 Group

To add a group, select <File> <Add Group>.

The <Create New Group> window will pop up. (See Fig. 9.13)

Fig. 9.13 Create New Group

Input new group name in the <Enter Group Name> field. Select the operations the group is allowed to perform. Click <Create Group> to finalize this new group. The new group name will appear beneath the Accounts tree. Click <Cancel> to withdraw this operation. Here a group named DemoGroup has been added. In the left panel, select the corresponding group. The properties of this group will appear in the right panel. (See Fig. 9.14)


58 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 9.14 New Group Added View

In the <Group Member for DemoGroup> tab: All the users that belong to this group will be listed in this tab. In the <DemoGroup> Group, there are no users. Click <Setting Members> to add or delete user in this group. (See Fig. 9.15)

Fig. 9.15 Select Users

Select the user in the left and click “>>” to add a user to this group. Select the user in the right and click “<<” to remove a user from this group.

In the <Operations for DemoGroup> tab: All the permitted operations are listed in this tab. (See Fig. 9.16)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 59

Fig. 9.16 Permitted operations for Group

Click <Setting Group Operation> to set the permitted operations for this group. (See Fig. 9.17)


60 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 9.17 Assign Group Permissions

Check the checkbox to the left of the operations to select or deselect a specific operation, or check the checkbox to the left of the group to select or deselect all the operations beneath it.

Click to expand all the branches, or to collapse all the branches.

Click <OK> to confirm and finish all the modifications. Click <Cancel> to quit this modification without any changes.

Note: It is not recommended to clear the Security operation permission for users in the Administration group. If done, the user can only clear the corresponding information in the database and can never operate the Security Management configuration.

To delete a group:

Select the corresponding group without users in the left panel.

Right click and select <Remove Group>.

Confirm in the warning window to delete this user.

9.1.3 View

Select <view> <Refresh> to update data about users and group.

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 61

9.2 Change Password From the main menu, select <Security>→<Change Password> to change password for the current user. The <Change Password> window will appear (See Fig. 9.18). Input the old password and the new one in the blanks. Click <OK> to confirm or click <Cancel> to quit the window.

Fig. 9.18 Change Password

9.3 Lock Screen In order to prevent unauthorized people from operating the system, the SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT will automatically lock after being idle for several minutes. Alternatively, the operator can choose <Security>→<Lock Screen> from the main toolbar to lock the screen manually. Only by inputting the user’s password in <Lock Screen> dialog can the operator re-open the LCT system. (See Fig. 9.19)

Fig. 9.19 Lock Screen

Select <Security>→<Lock Screen Config> to configure the properties of lock screen. (See Fig. 9.20)


62 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 9.20 LockScreen Config

Check the box to enable or disable the lock screen feature.

Enter the waiting time of lock screen.

Click <OK> to confirm the modifications.

Click <Cancel> to quit this dialog. All unsaved modifications will be lost.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 63

10 NE Configuration and Management Before performing actions on the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT, the LCT must be connected to an NE.

10.1 Chassis View When the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT is connected to an NE, the NE Chassis View will appear, which shows the real-time status of the NE. (See Fig. 10.1)

Fig. 10.1 Chassis View

For example, when the second card from the right side in Fig. 10.1 is plugged in, the green <Active> warning will be marked on the card. If the card is pulled out, the red <Absent> warning will be marked on the card.

In this view, a total representation of the current node status will appear, including a graphical view of all the slots, the card functions, the card types, the status of individual ports, the power status, and other NE functions. The user can modify node properties in the configuration windows. The configuration windows can be opened from the main menu bar or the right-click menu of the chassis view.


64 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Right-click the chassis view and select <Refresh Chassis> in the pop-up menu. (See Fig. 10.2)

Fig. 10.2 Refresh Chassis

Note: The system running without CC is forbidden. All cards will be fault and all service will be interrupted. In order to restore system and service, please re-install CC module first, then cold-reboot the system. The cold-reboot will take about 3 minutes. After reboot, all the configuration and service will be restored.

10.2 Synchronize NE In order to synchronize the LCT database with the NE’s database, the user must synchronize the NE using the following steps listed below.

Right-click the chassis view and select <Synchronize NE> (See Fig. 10.2).

Or select <Configuration> <Main Shelf> <Synchronize Main Shelf> in main menu. The <NE Synchronization> window will appear (See Fig. 10.3)

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 65

Fig. 10.3 Synchronize NE

Select the content to synchronize, and click <OK> to start the synchronization process. If the synchronization process succeeds, a message box will appear.

Click <Cancel> to quit the current window.

Click <Help> to launch the online help.

10.3 NE Property Configuration To open the <NE Properties> window, two methods can be used:

• In the chassis view, right-click and select <NE Property Configuration>.

• From the main menu, select <Configuration> <NE> <Main Shelf Property Configuration>.

The <Main Shelf Property Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 10.4)


66 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 10.4 Main Shelf Property Configuration

Each item in the window is described in the following table. (See Tab. 10.1)

Item Description

NE Type The type of the node NE Label This is used to distinguish different nodes Version The hardware version of this node. Location The physical position of this node in real-life IP Address The IP address of this node Description The user uses this to field to input his/her own detailed description

of this node Gateway The gateway of this node Contact The contact or owner of this node Serial Number The serial number of this node configured by the manufacturer Date/Time The current time on this node Card List The simple information of all the cards on this node. The user can

access the card configuration window by double-clicking the corresponding line in the table.

Tab. 10.1 Main Shelf Properties

The user can change properties of an NE, but modifications are completed only after the <Apply> button has been clicked.

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 67

Click <Refresh> to refresh the information of the window.

Click <OK> to confirm all the modifications and to close the window.

If some of the properties are changed, click the <Refresh> button to check the latest status of this node.

Click <Close> to close the window.

Click <Print> to print the information of this node.


10.4 Warm Reboot NE Warm rebooting will cause the NE offline for a while.

To Warm Reboot NE, select <Configuration> <NE> <Warm Reboot Main Shelf> from the main menu. (See Fig. 10.5)

Fig. 10.5 Warm Reboot NE

Then the Confirmation window will be shown. (See Fig. 10.6)

Fig. 10.6 Confirmation for warm rebooting NE

Click <Yes> in the window to confirm the command, or click <No> to cancel this operation.

10.5 Cold Reboot NE Cold rebooting will cause the traffic loss.

To cold reboot NE, select <Configuration> <NE> <Cold Reboot Main Shelf> from the main menu. (See Fig. 10.7)

Fig. 10.7 Cold Reboot NE


68 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Then a message box will appear. (See Fig. 10.8)

Fig. 10.8 Confirmation for cold rebooting NE

Click <Yes> in the window to confirm the command, or click <No> to cancel this operation.

10.6 Shut down NE To shut down NE, select <Configuration> <NE> <Shut down Main Shelf> from the main menu. (See Fig. 10.9)

Fig. 10.9 Shut down NE

Fig. 10.10 Shut down Information

Click <Yes> to confirm shutting down this NE. (See Fig. 10.10) The NE that has been shut down will be offline.

10.7 Add Extension Shelf The user can add hiT 7060 as extension shelf through TNMS-M System Administration Client. The added extension shelf can be accessible after opening the chassis view of the corresponding hiT 7060 4.1 network element in TNMS-M Client.

Before adding extension shelf, the user needs to link the extension shelf to the main shelf by fiber, and add a route from the extension shelf to gateway first to make sure that the extension shelf is accessible.

To add an Extension Shelf:

Open TNMS-M System Administration Client first, and select <NE Management> <NE Inventory> from the main menu. The <NE Inventory> window will appear. In <Physical> tab,


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 69

select one hiT 7060 4.1 NE which the Extension Shelf will to be added to in the left part, right click and select <Add Extension Shelf> in the pop-up menu. (See

Fig. 10.11)

Fig. 10.11 Add Extension Shelf

There are three fields in the window:

<Extension Shelf>

-<Extension Shelf ID>: Select Extension Shelf number from the drop down menu from 2 to 5. -<Extension Shelf IP>: Input Extension Shelf IP address. The user cannot add a batch of extension shelves.

<Main Shelf Side>

-<Work Card>: The card for working. It should be STM-4 card, or work as STM-4.

-<Work Port>: The port for working. It should be one port which has no SNCP, MSP, MS-Spring or other protections, no cross-connection except VC12. Its TP structure of work port should be TU12.

-<Protection Card>: The card for protection.

-<Protection Port>: The port for protection. It should be one port which has no SNCP, MSP, MS-SPRing, or other protections, and has no cross-connection.

<Extension Shelf Side>

-<Work Card>: The card for working. It is set as CC1_LC. The operator can not change its value.

-<Work Port>: The port for working.

-<Protection Card>: The card for protection. It is set as CC2_LC. The operator can not change its value.

-<Protection Port>: The port for protection.


70 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Click <OK> to confirm this NE. Then the system will check the conditions of the above information. Besides, if the configuration collides with the fiber link, or the IP address of the extension shelf has been used before, a warning window will be shown.

Click <Close> to quit the current dialog window. Click <Help> to launch online help. When adding extension shelf to the main shelf, the system will check the TP structure of the work port of the extension shelf. If it is not TU12, the TP structure will be changed into TU12 automatically. The system will add one MSP protection automatically. (See Fig. 10.12)

Fig. 10.12 MSP Protection If there is a MSP group existed between Main Shelf and the adding extension shelf wholly or partially, TNMS-M will check it. If MSP information in Main shelf is not correct, e.g. if the working port is not correct (not corresponding to the CC1_LC port of Extensions shelf), TNMS-M should display a warning message box, and quit the adding window. For this MSP protection, <Switch Direction> is set as <Bidirectional Switch> and cannot be changed. <Wait to Restore> of extension shelf can not be modified independently, it keeps the same with that of main shelf. After deleting extension shelf from the main shelf, the user needs to delete corresponding MSP protection manually. The two STM-4 ports on CC_LC slots of an extension shelf must be configured as timing sources of the extension shelf and timing mode of an extension shelf is AUTO. Otherwise, the system will fix extension shelf’s time automatically. Note: - If Server A has added extension shelf to the main shelf named NE1, Server B adds NE1 also. Then if Server B wants to see the extension shelf added to NE1, the operator can deactive NE1 first, then activate it.If Server B wants to add the same extension shelf to NE1, the operator should select the same card and port in the <Add Extension Shelf> window. - Extension shelf should be deleted and added again if user clears main/extension shelf`s MIB.

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 71

10.8 Delete Extension Shelf The user can remove extension shelf through TNMS-M System Administration Client. Follow the steps below to remove a node: Open TNMS-M System Administration Client first, and select <NE Management> <NE Inventory> from the main menu. The <NE Inventory> window will appear.In the <Physical> tab, right click on the Extension Shelf which the user wants to delete or its main shelf, and select <Delete Extension Shelf> in pop-up menu. Then a confirmation window will appear. (See Fig. 10.13)

Fig. 10.13 Delete Extension Shelves Click <Yes> to confirm the deletion, or click <No> to quit. The remove operation will only delete the information in the TNMS-M database; the information in Extension Shelf MIB still remains.

10.9 FTP Setting The FTP Setting can get the latest software and data support from the FTP server. To perform NE software management, MIB management, the user needs to configure first the TNMS-M FTP setting as well as the FTP server.

Use the following steps to apply FTP Setting:

From the main menu, select <Configuration> <NE FTP Configuration>. The <FTP setting> window will appear with the current FTP setting. (See Fig. 10.14)

Fig. 10.14 FTP Setting

To modify the current configuration in the <FTP Server Setting> section:

Input the FTP server’s IP address in the <FTP Server IP Address> field.

Input the FTP username in the <UserName> field.

Input the FTP user password in the <Password> field.

Note: Both of username and password are <pm> by default.

ii


72 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

All the latest software and data of FTP server are stored in the <%Install_Drive%\ftproot\%User name%> folder (%Install_Drive% specifies the drive letter of the hard disk drive containing the LCT program; %User name% specifies the folder name as FTP user name configured above). For example, if the LCT program is installed in Drive C, the FTP root will be the <C:\ftproot> folder (see Fig. 10.15).

Fig. 10.15 FTP Root

The data of the user <pm> will be stored in the corresponding folders under the <%Install_Drive%\ftproot\pm> folder. For example, the MIB files uploaded from the LCT program will be stored in the <%Install_Drive%\ftproot\pm\MibUpload> folder.

Click <Refresh> to update the current configuration.

Click <Apply> to confirm the modification. Settings will be applied and stored only after <Apply> is clicked.

Click <Close> to quit the window. All unsaved modifications will be lost.


Note: The configuration of the FTP server should be the same as the real FTP server settings. Generally, the LCT server and the FTP server are on the same physical machine. The case that LCT server and FTP server are on different machine is also supported.

10.10 NE Software Management Two software images can be stored in the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060, an active image and a backup image. Using the LCT, the user can download a TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 NE software image to the NE as the backup version from the FTP server or the user may switch software images between active and backup versions.

NE software management is done by the steps below:

From the main menu, select <Configuration> <NE Software Management>.

The <NE Software Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 10.16)

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 73

Fig. 10.16 NE Software Management

There are four sections as below in the window: <FTP Setting>, <Download NE Software>, the third section, and <Current Software Information>.

The third section provides the following information. (See Tab. 10.2)

Fields Description

Active Software Version The NE software version currently running

Status of Last Command The last command status

Tab. 10.2 The third section of the NE Software Management Window

In the first section, click <FTP Setting> to open the <FTP setting> window. (See Fig. 10.17)

Fig. 10.17 FTP Setting


74 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Input the corresponding information in the <FTP Server IP Address>, <UserName>, and <Password> fields.

Click <Refresh> to refresh the information.

Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications.



In the second section, input the NE software file name on the FTP server in the <Software file name> field, and click <Download software from …> to download the software image to the NE as the backup software version from the FTP server.

The <Current Software Information> section provides the following information:

<Location>: The location of the software.

<Role>: It may be <Active> or <Backup>.

<Name>: The name of the software.

<DateTime>: The install time of the software.

Click <Switch> to switch the software images between the active version and the backup version. After Switch process finished the <Result window> will pop-up to prompt users to cold reboot or warm reboot the NE. (See Fig. 10.18)

Fig. 10.18 NE Software Switch Result Windows

Note: 1) System cold reboot (system initialization) takes 3 minutes to complete. It is suggested

that no other operations (such as card insertion or pull-out, system power-on or power-off) be performed during the system initialization.

2) System cold reboot will cause traffic hit. The traffic hit time is about 30 second, maximum 3 minutes.

3) System warm reboot process takes 2 minutes. It is suggested that no operations (such as card insertion or pull out, system power on or power off) be performed during system reboot. Generally speaking, it will not cause traffic hit.

Click <Cancel> to close the window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.



Note: Make sure that the FTP server setting and the software image path are correctly configured before the operation is launched.

ii

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 75

10.11 MIB Management The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT MIB consists of the internal databases/files in the NE that store all the NE configuration and runtime status information. There are two versions of MIB files stored in the NE: one is the active version and another is a backup version, all the MIB management functions can be performed by using the LCT.

Follow the steps below to perform MIB management:

From the main menu, select <Configuration> <NE MIB Management>. The <MIB Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 10.19)

Fig. 10.19 MIB Management <Upload> tab

Fig. 10.20 MIB Management <Download> tab


76 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

In the <MIB Management> window, to upload the MIB files from the NE to the FTP server, input the directory in which the MIB files will be saved on the FTP server in the <Upload To

File> field in the <Upload> tab, and then click button. (See Fig. 10.19)

To download the MIB files from the FTP server to the NE, input the directory in which the MIB files exist in the <Download From File> field in the <Download> tab, and then click

button. (See Fig. 10.20)

To activate the backup MIB version, click <Switch NE MIB> in the <Download> tab. This operation will activate the backup MIB version.

To clear the MIB, click <Clear NE MIB> in the <Upload> tab. All the NE data will be restored to the factory default. In case of data lost, please upload MIB before clearing the MIB.

1. The download process can be canceled at anytime.

2. The operator can manually download the MIB database into the same software type of NE.

3. When MIB switch is executed, the network management system reminds user to “Warm reboot” or “Cold Reboot” the system based on the system operation manual. The user should reboot the system immediately. Before system reboot (after the MIB is switched), any NE operation will not be saved into MIB; therefore, any operation before system reboot is invalid.

The <Status> field shows the state of the operation.

10.12 NE Time Setting Open the corresponding chassis view.

From the main menu, select <Configuration> <NE Time Setting>.

An <NE Time Setting> window will appear. (See Fig. 10.21)

Fig. 10.21 NE Time Setting


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 77

In the drop-down menu of <Network Time Protocol>, the protocol can be set <Enabled> or <Disabled>.

Under <NE list (Active)>, select the corresponding NE whose time will be modified.

In the drop-down menu of <Network Element Time>, the current time can be viewed. The current time can be modified manually only when Net Time Protocol is set as “Disable”.

Click <Refresh> to check the latest information on setting time.


Click <Close> to quit the window, all the unsaved modifications will be lost.


10.13 NE Trap Destination Configuration Select <Configuration> <NE Trap Destination Configure>. An NE Destination Configuration window will appear. (See Fig. 10.22)

Fig. 10.22 NE Destination

The function of each button is described as follows:

Click <Apply> to set a selection in the window.

Click <Delete>, a confirm window will appear. (See Fig. 10.23)

Click <Refresh> to update current NE Destination.

Click <Close> to quit the window without saving any modifications.


Fig. 10.23 Confirmation for Delete


78 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

10.14 NE Resource Usage Statistics From the main menu, select <Configuration> <NE Resource Usage Statistics>. An <NE Resource Usage Statistics> window will appear. (See Fig.10.24)

Fig. 10.24 NE Resource Usage Statistics

All the cards and ports (except the data card) and their usages are listed in this table. Select one port, the details of this port will be listed in the table below.

Click <Statistic> to check the latest information of selected port.

Click <Print> to print the statistic status.

Click <Close> to quit the window.



A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 79

11 SDH Configuration and Management

11.1 Card Configuration and Management In the chassis view, the card selected becomes framed in blue.

There are two methods to open the card configuration window in chassis view:

• Right-click the card, select <Card Property Configuration>.

• Select the card, and select <Configuration> <Card Property Configuration> from the main menu.

A Card Properties window will appear. (See Fig. 11.1)

11.1.1 SDH Card Configuration and Management A typical window for card properties is shown below:

Fig. 11.1 Card Properties

Each field in the window is described as follows. (See Tab. 11.1)

Fields Description

Slot Number The slot this card has been plugged into. Card Function The function of the card. The function of the card will also

be showed in the chassis view, on the right top corner of this card, and in a floating window box after the mouse has been pointing on the card for a while.

Card Type The type of the card, such as, STM-16, STM-4, STM-1, GE, FE, SC, CC, CC_LC, etc.


80 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fields Description Card State The current state of this card Card Serial Number The serial number of this card Card Label This is used to distinguish different cards easily Boot Image Version The version of the boot server

Boot Image Date The time, when the boot server started Hardware Version The version of this card.

Temperature Threshold The threshold setting for the temperature alarm. When the temperature of this card is over the threshold, an alarm will be raised.

Temperature Clear Threshold

When the temperature has fallen below the temperature clear threshold, the temperature alarm will be automatically cleared.

S Code The S code of this card Working Mode The working mode of this card. (For 4×STM1/4 card,

CC_LC card only) Port list The list of all ports on this card.

Tab. 11.1 Card Identification

Note: For 4×STM-4/1 card, when it is inserted to slot 1, 2, 5, 6, its working mode can be switched between 1xSTM-4/1 and 4xSTM-1, when it is inserted to slot 7, 8, its working mode can be switched between 4xSTM4 and 4xSTM1, if there is any cc or protection or timing sources on the card, its working mode can’t be switched.

Note: The SC indicates the performance of CF. The LED’s on and off shows wether CF card is mounted or removed. The “Fault” LED of the SC slot shall be activated by the “Memory card failure” alarm. (See Tab. 11.2) System management: Free space is not enough in CF card

This event is reported when the usage of CF card is more than 95%. (CF card can not be written any long).

System management: Space is released in CF card

This event is reported when the usage of CF card is less than 90%. (CF card can be written again).

Tab. 11.2 CF related events and alarms

Alarm (ID=229), “Memory Card Failure”, default severity level is “Major”.

If any properties of a card have been modified, the <Apply> button must be used to validate these changes. And only after clicking this button, will the modification be completed.

While viewing the card options and not changing properties of the card, click <Refresh> to check the latest status of the card.

Click <Print> to print the information on this card.

Click <Close> to close the window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.


11.1.2 Synchronize the Card Right-click the corresponding card in the chassis view and select <Synchronize Card>. A confirmation window will appear. (See Fig. 11.2)

ii

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 81

Fig. 11.2 Synchronize Card

Click <Yes> to start the synchronization process.

Click <No> to cancel the synchronization process.

11.1.3 Delete Card When the card has an absent or mismatch status, right-click it and select <Delete Card> in the pop-up menu. Then click <Yes> in the pop-up warning window to confirm the deletion command, or click <No> to cancel this operation.

11.1.4 Cold Reboot Card Right-click a card and select <Cold Reboot Card> in the pop-up menu. Then click <Yes> in the pop-up warning window to confirm the command, or click <No> to cancel this operation.

11.2 SDH Port Configuration and Management There are two ways to open the <SDH Port Configuration> window:

• In the Chassis View, choose the corresponding port. Right-click, and select <SDH Port Property Configuration>.

• Open the port configuration in the <Card Properties> window, and double-click the line of the port to view or configure in the <Port List>.

The <SDH Port Properties> window will appear. (See Fig. 11.3)


82 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 11.3 SDH Port Properties

There are two parts in this window: <Port Properties> and <Port Status>. Each parameter in this window is described below. Generally, users can only change some parameters in the <Port Properties> part.

11.2.1 Port Properties

Fields Descriptions NE This identifies the NE which this SDH port belongs to. Card This identifies the card name and slot. Port This identifies the port. Port Type This identifies the type of optical port Port Label A user can change this field to distinguish among ports Port Mode There are three modes:

<Auto mode>: The system decides the optimum mode for this port. <Monitor mode>: When an alarm is generated from this card, it will be automatically reported to the alarm management. <Non-monitor mode>: No matter how many alarms are generated from this card, none of them will be reported.

Port Admin Mode There are two Port Admin Modes: <Enabled> (connected), or <Disabled> (unconnected)

Auto Laser Shutdown <Enabled> means the laser transmitter will shutdown automatically when the laser receiver detects loss of signal.

Port ALS Mode There are three ALS modes to be chosen: No Command, Manual Restart, Manual Test

Tab. 11.3 Port Properties


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 83

11.2.2 Port Status This section displays the SDH port current status.

Click<Advanced> on the right part of this section to see more information about the port status.The <Advanced Port Status Information> window will appear. (See Fig. 11.4)

Fig. 11.4 Advanced Port Status Information

There are two parts in the window: <Base Information> and <Status Details>.

Click <Refresh> to get the latest information of the port status.

Click <Close> to close the window and rerurn to the <SDH Port Properities> window.


If any properties of the port have been changed, click <Apply> to confirm them. Only after clicking this button has the modifications been completed (see Fig. 11.3)

If no changes are planned as the card has been inspected, click <Refresh> to check the latest status of the port.

Click <Print> to print the information of this port.

Click <Close> to quit the window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.


Note: While the Optical port type is SFP ---STM-1/4/16, FE, GE, the following table shows the parameters of this port:

ii


84 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fields Descriptions Range Unit Operating Status The port status

whether it is under operation or not.

Laser Bias Current Value of the laser bias current

0~131 mA

Received Laser Power

Optical power received through this port. (If the power is low, for example less than -40dBm, the sensor will not show its real number but will show –40)

<8.1 dBm

Transmitted Laser Power

Optical power transmitted out from this port. (If the power is low, for example less than -40dBm, the sensor will not show its real number but show -40)

<8.1 dBm

Laser Temperature Temperature of the laser

-128~+128 ºC

Tab. 11.4 Port Status

Note:

1. SFP optical monitor is based on SFF-8472. For SFP which can not support SFF-8472, all the monitor items should be shown as “N/A”. (Bit 1 of address 94 or Bit 6 of address 92, data field is A0H. If the value is 1, then the SFP supports SFF-8472 and digital diagnostic function. )

2. When the SFP connector type is not any one of the following connectors, SC, LC, MT-RJ, MU, Optical Pigtail. Then this SFP is regarded as electrical SFP, the four monitor item mentioned in the above table should be all displayed as “N/A”. (Data address is 02, data field is A0H. LC is 07H, SC is 01H, MT-RJ is 08H, MU is 09H, optical Pigtail is 0BH)

3. The Data address 3-10 is used for SFP type auto-sensing, which the basic of SFP_mismatch. The data address 10 is for Fiber channel. It will be also used for auto-sensing.

For example, 100Mbytes/s (bit 0 is 1) is 1.0625Gbps, which can support STM-4/1 and FE; 200Mbytes/s (bit 2 is 1) is 2.125Gbps, which can support STM-4/1, GE and FE; 400Mbytes/s (bit 4 is 1) is 4.25Gbps, which can support STM-16/4/1, GE and FE.

Fields Descriptions Unit Note

Compatible to SFF-8472

Specifies if it is Compatible to SFF-8472 or not

Nominal Bit Rate

Data address is 03-10, data field is A0H

Mbps

Laser Wavelength


nm 1. For normal optical SFP, 850nm/1310nm/1550nm will be displayed. The formula of laser wavelength: (Byte 60, 61)

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 85

Fields Descriptions Unit Note 2. For Electrical SFP (FE, GE, STM-1 E), “Wavelength: unspecified” is displayed.

Link Length supported for 9/125um Fiber

Data address is 14, data field is A0H

Km



m

Link Length supported for 62.5/125um Fiber


m

Link Length supported for copper


m

1. When the link length supported for any media type is 0 which is read from SFP EEPROM, the corresponding item should be displayed as “Link Length supported for xxxxxxxxxx: not supported”. For example, For Single mode fiber SFP,” Link Length supported for 9/125um Fiber: XXX Km” is displayed. Unit is Km. The other three transmission media types should be displayed as “unspecified”. For Multi mode fiber SFP, unit is m. “Link Length supported for 50/125um Fiber: XXX m” “Link Length supported for 62.5/125um Fiber: XXX m” are displayed. The other two transmission media types should be displayed as “unspecified”. For Electrical SFP, only” Link Length supported for copper: XXX m” is displayed. Unit is m. The other three transmission media types should be displayed as “unspecified”.

SFP Vendor Name(ASCII)


Part Number Provided by SFP Vendor


Serial Number Provided by SFP Vendor


Vendor’s Manufacturing Date


Tab. 11.5 Port Status-advanced

Note:

1. When the data of any above item stored in SFP EEPROM is “0”, then display “unspecified”.

2. The following table gives possible value of parameters according to different kinds of SFP. Electrical SFP Normal SFP

(only A0H) Normal SFP

(A0H and A2H) SFF-8472 No No Yes TX Optical Power N/A N/A √ Laser bias current N/A N/A √ RX receive Power N/A N/A √ Transceiver temperature

N/A N/A √

Nominal Bit rate √ √ √

ii


86 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Electrical SFP Normal SFP (only A0H)

Normal SFP (A0H and A2H)

Wavelength unspecified 850/1310/1550 850/1310/1550 Link Length supported for 9/125um Fiber

unspecified √ or unspecified

√ or unspecified



√ or unspecified

Link Length supported for 62.5/125um Fiber


√ or unspecified

Link Length supported for copper

√ unspecified unspecified

Vendor Name √ √ √ Vendor Part Number √ √ √ Vendor Serial Number

√ √ √

Manufacture Date √ √ √

Tab. 11.6 Value of Parameters for SFP

Electrical SFP includes STM-1 electrical SFP and GE electrical SFP.

Normal SFP (only A0H) includes STM-4/1and GE SFP, which does not support digital diagnostic function.

Normal SFP (A0H and A2H) includes STM-1/4/16 and GE SFP, which supports digital diagnostic function.

“√” in the table means that proper content will be displayed.

11.3 OA Port Configuration There are two ways to open the <OA Port Configuration> window:

- In the <Card Properties> window, double-click the line of the OA port item in the <Port List>.

- Select the OA port, right click it and click <OA Port Property Configuration> from the popped menu.

The <OA Port Properties> window will appear. There are two tabs in the window: <Basic> and <Module>.

Basic tab (See Fig. 11.5):


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 87

Fig. 11.5 OA Port Properties-Basic

In the <Port Properties> panel, the contents of <Card>, <Port> and <Port Type> are shown. Enter <Port Label> to identify this port. The <Alarm Monitor> and <Admin Mode> can be modified by selecting corresponding items in the drop-down menu.

In the <Version and Serial Number>, corresponding version information is listed.

In the <Pump> field, all kinds of pump parameters are listed.

<Pump Type>: Single Pump

<Power Supply Voltage (V)>: OA card Power Supply Voltage; precision measured to 0.01V.

<Pump1 Power (mW)>: OA card Pump1 Power; precision measured to 0.01 mW.

<Pump1 Drive Current (mA)>: OA card Pump1 Drive Current; precision measured to 0.1 A.

<Pump1 Max Drive Current (mA)>: OA card Pump1 Max Drive Current; precision measured to 0.1 A.

<Pump2 Power (mW)>: OA card Pump2 Power; precision measured to 0.01 mW.

<Pump2 Drive Current (mA)>: OA card Pump2 Drive Current; precision measured to 0.1 A.

<Pump2 Max Drive Current (mA)>: OA card Pump2 Max Drive Current; precision measured to 0.1 A.

Module tab (See Fig. 11.6)

In this tab, actual Power and Gain are listed.


88 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 11.6 OA Port Properties-Module

<Input Power (dBm)>: OA card Input Power, precision measured to 0.01 dBm

<Output Power (dBm)>: OA card current Output Power, precision measured to 0.01 dBm.

<Max Output Power (dBm)>: OA card maximum Output Power, precision measured to 0.01 dBm.

<Module Type>: Can hold values <PreAmplifier>, <BoosterAmplifier>, or <LineAmplifier>.

<Module Gain (dB)>: OA card current Module Gain, precision to 0.01 dB.

<Module Temperature (°C)>: OA card temperature; measured in 0.1°C increments.

Each attribute below has two values, Real value and Expected value. The user can set the Expected value based on application.

<Auto Shutdown>: Can set value to <Enabled> or <Disabled>.

<Operation Mode>: Can set value to <Constant current>, <Constant gain> or <Constant power>.

<Expected Output Power (dBm)>: OA card expected output power. the precision is 0.01 dBm, while the step to spin up/down from the dialog is 0.10.

<Expected Gain (dB)>: OA card Expected Module Gain, the precision is 0.01 dB, while the step to spin up/down from the dialog is 0.10.

<Shutdown Output when Input Optical Power Low Threshold (dBm)>: OA card shutdown threshold, the precision is 0.01 dBm, while the step to spin up/down from the dialog is 0.10.

<Input Optical Power Low threshold (dBm)>: Minimum Input Optical Power of OA card, the precision is 0.01 dBm, while the step to spin up/down from the dialog is 0.10.

<Output Optical Power Low threshold (dBm)>: Minimum Output Optical Power of OA card, the precision is 0.01 dBm, while the step to spin up/down from the dialog is 0.10.

<Temperature Low Threshold (-5.0~0.0°C)>: OA card low temperature threshold; measured by 0.1°C increments.

<Temperature High Threshold (50.0~70.0°C)>: OA card high temperature threshold measured by 0.1°C increments.

Click <Refresh> to get latest information.

Click <Apply> to confirm modifications in the window.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 89

Click <Ok> to confirm change and quit the window.

Click <Close> to quit this window without saving any modifications.

Click <Restore Default> to restore all default values.

Click <Help> to launch online help.

11.4 E1 Port Configuration There is one way to open the <E1 Port Configuration> window:

Open the port configuration in the <Card Properties> window, and double-click the line of the E1 port to view or configure in the <Port List>. The <E1 Port Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 11.7)

Fig. 11.7 E1 Port Configuration

The window is divided into two panels: <Port Properties> and <Port Status>.

<Port Properties> panel:

<NE>: The NE which the port belongs to.

<Card>: The card name and its slot which the port belongs to.

<Port Selection>: The port number.

<Port Label>: The label of the port.

<Port Type>: The type of the port.

<Port Mode>: Can be set as <Auto Mode>, <Monitor Mode>, or <Non-monitor Mode>.


90 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

<Port Admin Mode>: Possible values are <Enabled> or <Disabled>, which means the port is enabled or disabled.

<Mapping Mode>: The mapping mode of the port.

<Code Type>: The code type of the port.

<Re-timing Status>: Possible values are <Enabled> or <Disabled>, which means re-timing is enabled or disabled.

Note: Only when the card has retiming function (63×E1/R), will the following two parameters appear:

<Expected Frame Structure>: Possible values are Unframed or Framed, when Framed is selected, it means LOF alarm inspection is enabled; while if Unframed is selected, it means LOF alarm inspction is disabled. Note that when Expected Frame Structure is unframed, disable the CRC Multiframe Detector automatically and can not be changed.

<CRC Multiframe Detector>: Possible values are Deactivated or Activated, when Activated is selected, it means LOM and RDI alarm inspection is enabled; while if Deactivated is selected, it means LOM and RDI alarm inspection is disabled.

<Port Status> panel:

<Operation Status>: Decide whether the port status is under operation or not.

Click <Refresh> to check the real-time E1 port properties.

Click <Apply> to accept modifications in the window.

Click <OK> to confirm changes and quit the window.


Click <Print> to print the information of the E1 Port.


11.5 Cross-Connection Configuration and Management To manage all cross-connection in the NE, open the <Cross-Connect Management> window. There are two methods to open this window:

• Select <Configuration> <Cross-Connect Management> in main window, or

• Select and right-click a cross-connect device card in the chassis view, and select <Cross-Connect Management> in the pop-up menu.

The <Cross-Connect Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 11.8)

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 91

Fig. 11.8 Cross Connect Management

Use this window to query, create, or delete cross-connection.

11.5.1 Querying Current Cross-Connection Usually there are many Cross-Connections established within one NE. The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT provides a method of easily viewing them by providing a Query function.

Input querying parameters

There are several selectable parameters to restrict the range of Cross-Connect, including <A/Z Card> (<A/Z Port>), <Capacity>, <Circuit Label>, <Direction>, and <Type>.

Select these parameters from the drop-down menus to find the Cross-Connect of interest, i.e. the target Cross-Connect.

After choosing a specific Source Card or Sink Card, manually choose the port to restrict the Cross-Connect to a more limited range.

Input a specific Circuit ID to go to those Cross-Connections directly.

Click <Query> to view all Cross-Connections which satisfy the chosen conditions.

When the mouse moves to a Cross-Connection, the tool tips feature will appear.

Click <Print> to print the information.


11.5.2 Adding a New Cross-Connection Click <Create> to add a Cross-Connection; the <Create Cross Connection> window will appear. (See Fig. 11.9)


92 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 11.9 Create Cross-Connect

Choose the Cards and Ports between which a Cross-Connection is to be created; all available TPs (See Fig. 11.9) will be listed.

Choose the source and the destination TPs, and click <Apply>.

The <Apply> and <OK> buttons can only be used if two available ports have been selected.

Click <Apply> to confirm the addition without closing the window and allowing additional cross-connections to be made.

Click <OK> to confirm the changes and close the window.

Click <Cancel> to exit the <Create Cross-Connect> window.


11.5.3 Deleting a Cross-connection In the <Cross-Connection Management> window, cross-connections can be selectively deleted.

Click <Delete>, a warning window will appear.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 93

Fig. 11.10 Confirmation for deleting Cross-Connections

Click <Yes> to confirm the deletion.

Click <No> to cancel the deletion.

11.6 TP Configuration and Management

11.6.1 Querying Current Terminal Point Select <Configuration> <TP Configuration>.

The <TP Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 11.11)

Fig. 11.11 TP Configuration (View 1 - As Presented)


94 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Select the <Card> and <Port> to be checked, or select All STM, Data and E1 Cards or All STM and E1 Ports to check all the TPs on cards and ports.

Click <Query> to check the TPs. (See Fig. 11.12)

Fig. 11.12 TP Configuration (View 2 - Engaged)

Select and view the TP to be modified and make desired changes to TP properties. The properties of this TP will be showed in the right panel.

Every parameter is described in the table below. Fields Descriptions

TP Alarm Mon Can be set as Monitored or Non-Monitored TIM Enable Can be set as Disabled or Enabled TI Trans Mode Can be set as 16-byte, Fixed 1-byte, Provisioned 1-byte TI Rec Mode Can be set as 16-byte, Fixed 1-byte, or provisioned 1-byte

Transmitted TI Shows the transmitted TI,can be changed only when T1 Trans Mode is set as 16-byte

Received TI Shows the received TI, can be changed only when T1 Rec Mode is set as 16-byte

Expected TI Shows the expected TI,cannot be changed SL Enabled Can be set as Enabled or Disabled Transmitted SL Shows the transmitted SL Received SL Shows the accepted SL Expected SL Can be set to various values. DEG Enable Can be set as Enabled cr Disabled DEG Threshold The value can be set as 10exp(-6) , 10exp(-7), 10exp(-8) or

10exp(-9), determined by the TP type EXC Enable Can be set as Enabled or Disabled. EXC Threshold The value can be set between 10exp(-3) and 10exp(-5),

determined by the TP type Tab. 11.7 TP Management Parameters


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 95

If any TP properties have been changed, the <Apply> button will be presented enabling its use. Only after clicking the <Apply> button, will the modifications be completed.

Click <Print> to send the TP information to a file or a printer.



11.6.2 TP Multiplexing Structure To open TP mapping, select <Configuration> <TP Multiplexing Structure>.

The <TP Multiplexing Structure> window will appear. (See Fig. 11.13)

Fig. 11.13 TP Multiplexing Structure Query

Select the corresponding Card and then Port. Then click <Query> to view the TP Multiplexing Structure for the selected port. (See Fig. 11.14)

Fig. 11.14 TP Multiplexing Structure, View 1

Click the plus sign to expand the tree, click the minus sign to collapse the tree. Use a right-click on the point and choose Expand to open only this branch or Expand All to open all the branches including the sub-branches. (See Fig. 11.15)


96 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 11.15 TP Multiplexing Structure, View 2

The point color indicates its status: blue color indicates that this point is vacant and the brown color indicates it is occupied.green color indicates it is occupied by MS-SPRing.

If the TP is unused, it can be mapped by highlighting and right-clicking the point. (See Fig. 11.16)

Fig. 11.16 Modify Mapping

After modifications of all the mappings are finished, click <Apply> to confirm the modification.

To check the real-time mapping information, click <Query> at anytime.

Click <Close> to exit the <TP Multiplexing Structure> window.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 97

Note: There is no tributary channel numbering present.

The displaying rule for KLM in LCT (based on timeslot) is compliant with ITU-T G.707 standard.

LCT has supported sorting according to tributary (and it is the default displayed mode), and there is KLM value. Operator can find the relationship between the timeslot number (TS#) and tributary number (Trib#) according to table listed below.

TU-3 TU-12 TS# Trib# TU-3 TU-12 TS# Trib# TU-3 TU-12 TS# Trib#

100

111

112

113

121

122

123

131

132

133

141

142

143

151

152

153

161

162

163

171

172

173

1

22

43

64

4

25

46

67

7

28

49

70

10

31

52

73

13

34

55

76

16

37

58

79

19

40

61

82

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

200 211

212

213

221

222

223

231

232

233

241

242

243

251

252

253

261

262

263

271

272

273

2

23

44

65

5

26

47

68

8

29

50

71

11

32

53

74

14

35

56

77

17

38

59

80

20

41

62

83

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

300 311

312

313

321

322

323

331

332

333

341

342

343

351

352

353

361

362

363

371

372

373

3

24

45

66

6

27

48

69

9

30

51

72

12

33

54

75

15

36

57

78

18

39

60

81

21

42

63

84

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

Tab. 11.8 Tributary (Trib#) to KLM to Timeslot (TS#) Numbers Mapping

11.7 Synchronization Management The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT supports multiple timing references. Each reference can be configured as an STM-N, TimeIN1, and TimeIN2. Each of the references has 4 quality levels of priority.

• Right-click the CC Card, and select <Synchronization Management>, or

ii


98 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

• Select <Configuration> <Synchronization Management>

The <Synchronization Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 11.17)

Fig. 11.17 Synchronization Management

- <The Current Reference>: The current timing reference of this NE.

- <The System Clock State>: The current timing status of this NE.

- <Operation Mode>: The current operation mode of this NE, including the following three options:

- Freerunning: When Synchronization Supply Units and SDH equipment clocks cannot access stored data, or have never had a reference input, they use their own internal clocks to generate the synchronization signal until the network is restored.

- Holdover: When the quality of the synchronization inputs falls below accepted levels, Synchronization Supply Units and SDH equipment clocks first use stored data to control phase and frequency variations.

- AutoSelection: The clock has its frequency phase locked to an input reference signal.

- <Timing Source and Status>: The timing source and status of the NE will be shown in the table. To configure one timing source, If the timing source is a reference, double-click this timing source in the table and the corresponding Timing Source Reference Properties window will be shown. If the timing source is not a reference, double-click this timing source in the table and the corresponding Timing Source Properties window will be shown. Or right click one row, select <Properties> from the drop-down menu.

Click<Add> to add a timing source as a reference, click <Remove> to remove an existing one.

Note: In case there are more than one Reference clock in the system, when Frequency-Monitor is disabled, Add 12-13ppm on a normal Reference, the system will holdover on it, and not switch to another available reference.

Click <Refresh>to check the latest status of the timing reference.

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 99

Click <Global Setting>to launch the <Global Setting> window.

Click <Station Clock> to launch the <Station Clock> window.

Click <System Clock>to launch the <System Clock> window.


Click <Print> to print out the information of this port.


11.7.1 Global Setting Click <Global Setting> to open the Global Setting of the Synchronization Management. (See Fig. 11.18)

Fig. 11.18 Global Settings

<QL Mode> enables quality level available or not. Select <Enabled> in the drop-down menu.

When <Enabled> is selected in the <QL Mode> drop-down menu, the <Expected_QL> menu will be available. Choose <PRC(0×2)>, <SSU-A(0×4)>, <SSU-B(0×8)>, or SEC(0×0B)> from the drop-down menu.<Frequence Offset Monitor Mode> enables Frequency Offset Monitoring available or not.

Click <Refresh> to check the real-time status.

Click <Apply> to accept modifications.



11.7.2 Configuring the Timing Source of NE Click <Station Clock> to open the <StationClock Setting> window. (See Fig. 11.19) There are four I/O routes in one SURPASS hiT 7060, two <Station Clock Input> ports and two <Station Clock Output> ports. Switch between them by using two tabs. (See Fig. 11.19, Fig. 11.20, and Fig. 11.21)


100 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 11.19 Station Clock Setting Reference Time IN

Every field is described in the table below:

Fields Descriptions

Monitored Status Can be set as auto, monitored, or unmonitored

Signal Type Can be set as 2MHz, 2Mbit/s UnFramed, or 2Mbit/s Framed

Sa bit Can be set from Sa4-Sa8

Tab. 11.9 Timing Source Management Time IN Window Parameters

To prevent a loop automatically, check the <Auto Loop Prevention> box.

Fig. 11.20 Station Clock Settings Reference Time Out

Set the <station clock parameters> in the drop-down menu under the <Station Clock Output> tab. The parameters include <Monitored Status>, <Signal Type>, and <Sa bit>.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 101

For the chosen signal type, configure the output clock quality including<Output Type>, <Squelch Mode>, <Threshold>, <Output QL> and <Output Status>. The <Output QL> will change accordingly.

In the <ClockOut Reference> tab (See Fig. 11.21), configure the reference clock.

Fig. 11.21 Station Clock Setting Reference Time Out (Clock Out Reference)

Click <Apply> to accept modifications in each window.

Click <Refresh> to check the real-time status.



11.7.3 Configuring the System Clock To configure the system clock, click <System Clock>. (See Fig. 11.17) The <System Clock> window will appear. (See Fig. 11.22)

Fig. 11.22 System Clock

The Current Reference, The SystemClock State, and Last External Switch Request show the current timing status and configuration.


102 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

The Operation Mode indicates the current operation mode of this NE, including:

<Freerunning> – When Synchronization Supply Units and SDH equipment clocks cannot access stored data, or have never had a reference input, they use their own internal clocks to generate the synchronization signal until the network is restored.

<Holdover>– When the quality of the synchronization inputs falls below accepted levels, Synchronization Supply Units and SDH equipment clocks first use stored data to control phase and frequency variations.

<Auto Selection> – The clock has its frequency phase locked to an input reference signal.

Select one of the three options in the <Operation Mode> field, and then click <SetMode> to change the mode. When <AutoSelection> is selected, modify the <Request> and <Reference> settings if <Force> or <Manual> in <Request> has been selected. Click <Switch> to confirm the changes. If the <Request> state is <Clear>, the <Reference> option will be grayed out.

Click <Refresh> to check the latest information.



11.7.4 Configuring the Reference Use <Synchronization Management> window (See Fig. 11.17) to configure the time reference.

Double-click the corresponding time reference, and a <TimingSource Reference Properties> window will appear. (See Fig. 11.23)

Fig. 11.23 Timing Source Reference Properties

In the <Timing Source Reference Properties> window, the current status of the selected timing source is shown.

Select the corresponding Priority from 1 (the highest priority) to 999 (the lowest priority).

Check <Lockout> to keep the reference valid.

Check <Monitored> to monitor the reference.

Select the <QL Provisioned Mode> in the drop-down menu; options include <Auto> or <Provisioning> modes. In the <Auto> mode, the QL cannot be changed, while in the <Provisioning> mode, the QL can be set to a given value.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 103

When setting the <QL Provisioned Mode> to Provisioning, select the desired quality level in the drop-down menu. The QL levels include:

PRC (Primary Reference Clock): A reference frequency standard comprising an ensemble of PRS that provide a reference frequency signal compliant with ITU G.811 or ETSI EN 300 462-6-1. The free run accuracy of PRC must be 10-11.

SSU-A (Quality Level - SSU Transit): One of the SSM codes. This indicates that the clock source is traceable to a transit node SSU and should be indicated using a '0100' code.

SSU-B (Quality Level - SSU Local): One of the SSM codes. This indicates that the clock source is traceable to a local node SSU and should be indicated using a '1000' code.

SEC (Quality Level – SEC): One of the SSM codes. This indicates that the clock source is traceable to an SEC and should be indicated using a '1011' code.

DNU (Quality Level - Do Not Use): One of the SSM codes. Do Not Use for Synchronization code is used to prevent timing loops and is transmitted in the opposite direction on interfaces used to synchronize equipment’s clock denoted by <1111>.

If user wants to monitor frequency offset, select <Monitored> in <Frequence Offset Monitored> dropdown menu, and the <Frequence Offset Upper Threshold> and <Frequence Offset Lower Threshold> properties become available. Otherwise select <Non-Monitored> ,<Frequence Offset Upper Threshold> and <Frequence Offset Lower Threshold> properties become grey and unavailable.

Select the <Frequence Offset Monitor Mode> in the drop-down menu; options include <Monitored> and <Non-Monitored>

<Frequence Offset Upper Threshold> and <Frequence Offset Lower Threshold> define the maximum and the minimum frequency offset.

In <Frequence Offset>, current frequency offset is shown.


Click <Close> to quit the window without saving.

11.8 EOW Configuration In chassis view, select <Configuration> <EOW Management> to set the Engineering Order Wire. The <EOW Config window> will appear. (See Fig. 11.24 )

Fig. 11.24 EOW Config Window

To disable EOW settings, click the box to the left of the corresponding Disable box.

To enable the EOW, set the correct card, port, and channel.


104 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Note:

EOW1 will be connected to external RJ45 connector#1;



EOW4 will be connected to external RJ45 connector#2.

The two RJ45 connectors can be connected to the EOW Box by means of a direct (un-crossed) LAN cable.

Click <Refresh> to check the latest information of EOW.




Click <Print> to print the information.

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 105

12 Ethernet Configuration and Management Note: Some configurations and menus below are based on Ethernet cards supporting Layer2 service.

12.1 Card Configuration and Management

In the chassis view, the card selected becomes framed in blue.

To open the card configuration dialog window in the chassis view:

- Right click the card and, select <Card Property Configuration>.

A typical window for card properties is shown as below (see Fig. 12.1 and Fig. 12.2).

Fig. 12.1 Card Properties for Ethernet L2 Card

ii


106 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 12.2 Card Properties for Ethernet Transparent Card

Each field in the window is described as follows (see Tab. 12.1).

Fields Description

Slot Number The slot which this card has been plugged into.

Card Function The function of the card. The function of the card will also be shown in the chassis view, on the right top corner of this card, and in a floating window box after the mouse cursor has been pointing on the card for a while.

Card Type The type of the card, such as, 2xGE+8xFE(A)/(AE), 6xFE(L2), 8xFE(T), 2xGE(T),etc.

Card State The current state of this card: active, absent, mismatch, provisioning, or initializing

Card Serial Number The serial number of this card

Card Label This is used to help distinguish different cards easily

Boot Image Version The version of the boot server

Boot Image Date The time when the boot server started

Hardware Version The version of this card

Temperature Threshold The threshold setting for the temperature alarm. When the temperature of this card is over the threshold, an alarm will be activated


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 107

Fields Description

Temperature Clear Threshold When the temperature has fallen below the temperature clear threshold, the temperature alarm will be automatically cleared

Code The code of this card

MTU Size The size of the MTU

Note: For 2xGE+8xFE(A)/(AE) card, MTU size is 1536(Tagged),1518(Untagged); 1800(Tagged),1518(Untagged); 1920(Tagged),1916(Untagged)

Port list The list of all ports on this card

Tab. 12.1 Card Identification

If any properties of a card have been changed, the <Apply> button must be used to validate these changes. And only after clicking this button will the modification be completed.

Note: The Backplane Bandwidth of the card is listed in the following table:

Card Backplane Bandwidth

6xFE/L2 1×VC-4 (shared by 2 FE WAN ports)

2xGE+8xFE/A and 2xGE+8xFE/AE

8×VC-4 (shared by 1xGE and 31xFE WAN ports)

2xGE+8xFE/RPR 16×VC-4 (each WAN has 8×VC-4)

8xFE/T 1×VC-4 (shared by 8 WAN)

2xGE/T 16×VC-4 (shared by 2 WAN)

Tab. 12.2 Backplane Bandwidth of the card

Click <Refresh> to check the latest status of the card.


Click <Close> to quit this dialog. All unsaved modifications will be lost.


12.2 Bridge Configuration To open the <Bridge Configuration> window, right-click the corresponding Ethernet card and select <Bridge Configuration> in pop-up menu.

The <Bridge Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.3)


108 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 12.3 Bridge Configuration

The <Bridge Configuration> section can display the current NE, Card name, and the status of the bridge in corresponding items.

Select the type of tag needed from the <Bridge Mode> drop-down menu. Available values are <IEEE 802> mode, when the native frame will not be tagged and <Double Tag> mode, when the native frame will be tagged.

Note: The definition of “tagged” or “untagged” frame is as follow:

1) For IEEE 802.3 Tag Bridge Mode (Ethernet Type value of Bridge is “0x8100”): If the incoming frame is been tagged and the Ethernet Type value in the first tag is equal to “0x8100”, then we call it “tagged”; if the incoming frame is without a tag or if with a tag, but the Ethernet Type value in the first tag (after Destination Address field) is not equal to “0x8100”, then we call it “untagged”.

2) For Double Tag Bridge Mode (Ethernet Type value of Brideg is not equal to “0x8100”, default value is “0xFFFF”): If the incoming frame is tagged and the Ethernet Type value is equal to that of local Double Tag Bridge, then we call it “tagged”; if the incoming frame is without a tag or if with a tag, but the Ethernet Type value of the first tag in the incoming customer frame is not equal to that of local Double Tag Bridge, then we call it “untagged”.

Input a text string in the <Label> field to help identify this bridge.

<MAC aging time> indicates the living time of MAC address. Different cards have different aging time range:

1) For a 6×FE/L2 card, the range is from 10s to 630s, in step of 10s, 300s by defaut;

2) For 2×GE+8×FE/A&2×GE+8×FE/AE card, the range is from 14 seconds to 75 minutes, in step of 14 seconds, 294 seconds by default.

Note: For different card types, there are different algorithms to get the actual value of MAC aging timing from the value setted in the window. Only with a correct description can an

ii

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 109

operator use the time. 1) For 2×GE+8×FE/A and 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, the range of actual value of aging time is between (integer [aging/14] ×13) to (integer [aging/14] ×14). The expression of integer [aging/14] means to get the integer part of aging/14, while aging is the setted valuel in the window.

2) For the 6×FE card, the range of actual value of aging time is from (aging) to (aging×2), while expression of aging is the same as front.

For different card types, the output rate of port rate limiting and vlan+port rate limiting can be calculated by the following ways.

1) For 6×FE/L2:

The output rate of port rate limiting can be calculated by the following formula (same with VLAN rate limiting).

crclengthtagdessrctotal

totalito lllllL

LVV−−−−−

×= lim

Vo : output rate

Vlimit : limiting rate

Ltotal : total frame size（including 4 CRC Bytes）

lsrc : SourceMAC Address size, 6 Bytes

ldes : DestinationMAC Address size, 6 Bytes

ltag : 4 Tag Bytes

llength : 2 frame length Bytes

lcrc : 4 CRC Bytes

2) For 2×GE+8×FE/A and 2×GE+8×FE/AE card: the output rate is just same with port limit rate.

Below this window, there are two tables, which list all LAN and WAN ports. Click the tab to change the table between them. After selecting one port, double-click it to see more detail information about this port.

Note: MUT configuration is at <Card property configuration>.


Click <Apply> to confirm the modification without closing the window.

Click <OK> to confirm the modification if the user wants this window closed.

Click <Close> to quit the window. All unsaved changes will be lost.

Click <Print> to print the information of the bridges properties.

Click<Help> to launch the online help.

12.3 LAN Card Configuration and Management LAN card configuration and management is similar to SDH card configuration and management.

12.3.1 LAN Port Configuration There are two ways to open the <LAN Port Property Configuration> window:

ii


110 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

1. Right click the corresponding Ethernet card, and select <LAN Ports Property Configuration> from the popped menu.

2. Select one port of the corresponding Ethernet card, right click it, and select <LAN Port Property Configuration> from the popped menu.

Then the <LAN Port Property Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.4)

Note: For the window opened with the first way, the <Port> field in the <Properties> section is available, the operator can select port from the drop-down menu; while for the window opened with the second way, the <Port> field in the <Properties> section is unavailable.

Note: For 2×GE+8×FE/A and 2×GE+8×FE/AE cards, there are two interfaces on a single physical Ethernet port. In detail, FE Port 1 and 5 share physical port 1; ports 2 and 6 share port 2; ports 3 and 7 share port 3; ports 4 and 8 share port 4. If the user right-clicks one FE port on such a card and selects <LAN Ports Property Configuration> in the pop-up menu, a window will first pop up to let the user choose a specific port before the <LAN Port Property Configuration> window appears.

On the panel of 2×GE+8×FE/A and 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, there are two LEDs beside each RJ-45 connector, indicating the link and data receiving/transmitting status for the two Ethernet ports on the RJ-45 respectively. For example, as to physical RJ-45 port1, the upper LED is used for Ethernet port 5, and the underlying LED is used for Ethernet port 1. LED “ON” means the link of the Ethernet port is set up, while “OFF” means the link of the Ethernet port is down. For the 6FE /L2, 8xFE/T and GE port, the link of the Ethernet port do not flash when there are data received or transmitted

Fig. 12.4 LAN Port Property Configuration (1)

The <Properties> section provides the following information:

<Card> – The slot number and card type of the Ethernet card.

ii

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 111

<Port> – The port of the Ethernet card.

<Admin Mode> – Can be set as <Enabled> or <Disabled>.

<Monitored Mode> – Can be set as <Auto>, <Monitor>, or <Non-Monitor>.

<Port Type>: FE or GE port.

<Port Label>: The port name defined by user to distinguish different ports. It can be changed in this window.

<Link Status>: Up or Down. Specify the port situation based on the link transmission direction.

<PVID>: The PVID is the Port VLAN Identification. Only one PVID can be specified for each port. The optional value is 1 – 1000 and 1025 – 4094, while 0, 1001 – 1024 and 4095 are reserved by system. If the <Bridge Mode> is set to be <Double Tag> in the <Bridges Properties> window, the PVID must be set on LAN ports.

<Port ALS Mode>: There are three ALS modes: No Command, Manual Restart, Manual Test. The user can change the value.

<Auto Laser Shutdown>: <Yes> or <No>. The user can change the value.

<BroadCast Rate Limit (%)>: User can control broadcast storm via configure this attribute. Select this attribute enable or disable and input the corresponding value in the blank. The range of the value is 1% – 100%, in step of 1%. The default value is 30%.

Select <Enabled> from the drop-down menu to make the Broadcast rete limit available or select <Disabled> to make it unavailable.

<Egress Tag Mode> – Can be set as <Untag> or <Tag>. When it is configured as <Tag>, it will keep the outer tag in the egress of the LAN port. When it is configured as <Untag>, it will strip the outer tag.

For Ethernet/T card, there is one more menu:

<Port Disabled on CSF/TLCT> – The available choices are false and true. Enabling/disabling can be set by operator according to CSF/TLCT defect information, default is disabling.

In the <Input Rate Limiting> panel, if <Not Applied> radio button is checked, the rate limitation can not be changed. If <Port Based> is checked, the user can input the corresponding rate limits. The unit is kbps. Otherwise, when <Port+VLAN Based> is checked, the VLAN Rate Limit Configuration settings are introduced in 12.3.2.

The following attributes are provided by the <Auto Negotiation Parameter> section:

<Auto Negotiation>: It can be set as <Enabled> or <Disabled>. When <Disable> is selected, the <Flow Control>, <Port Speed> and <Duplex Mode> must be specified by user. When <Enable> is selected, these three attributes can be auto set according the application and the corresponding button is unavailable.

<Flow Control>: Enabled or Disabled.

<Duplex Mode>: Full or Half.

<Port Speed>: The speed of the port, it may be 100M or 10M.

<MDI/MDIX Mode>: Auto, MDI, or MDIX. Its value can not be change when the Auto Negotiation field is set as Enabled. MDI means medium dependent interface- straight, while MDIX means medium dependent interface- cross-over.

Note: This item is only available for the LAN Port Property Configuration window for FE LAN Port.

In the <Ingress CoS Configuration> panel, if <Keep Original CoS> is checked, the CoS configuration can not be changed. If <Port Based> is checked, the user can select the CoS class from the drop-down menu. There are four selections: Lowest, Low, High, Highest.

ii


112 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Otherwise if <Port+VLAN Based> is checked, the CoS settings are introduces in Chapter 12.3.3.

The configuration of <Egress Priority Weight Configuration> section is introduced in 12.3.4



Click <OK> to confirm the modification and close the window.

Click <Close> to quit the window. All the unsaved changes will be lost.


When the Ethernet card is transparent card, the <LAN Port Property Configuration> window will appear as Fig. 12.5.

Fig. 12.5 LAN Port Property Configuration (2)

Note: Differnet cards support different maximum frame size and dynamic MAC address table size:

1) For a 6×FE/L2 card, the supported maximum frame size is 1536 bytes and the dynamic MAC address table size is 63K available for customer;

2) For a 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, the supported maximum frame size is 1536 or 1800 bytes if the frame is tagged. Otherwise, the supported maximum frame size is always 1518 bytes. And the dynamic MAC address table size is 8K available for customer;

3) For a 2×GE/T card, if the TP ID of incoming frame is “0x8100”, the MTU is 1536+4 or 1800+4; if the TP ID of incoming frame is not “0x8100”, the MTU is 1536 or 1800.

12.3.2 Rate Limit Configuration In the <LAN Port Property Configuration> window (See Fig. 12.4), check the <Port+VLAN Based> radio button in the <Input Rate Limiting> field and the <Port+VLAN Based> button will be available. Click the button, then the <VLAN Rate Limit Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.6)

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 113

Fig. 12.6 VLAN Rate Limit Configuration

All the VLAN Rate Limit information will be displayed in the <VLAN Rate Limit Configuration> window.


Click <Add> to create a new VLAN Rate Limit. (See Fig. 12.7)

Click <Delete> to delete the selected item.

Click <Modify> to modify the selected item.

Click <Close> to quit this window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.


Fig. 12.7 Add VLAN Rate Limit


114 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

In the <Add VLAN Rate Limit> window, input the ID of VLAN in the <VLAN ID> field.

In the <Rate Limit> field, input the rate limite.

Note: Different ports on different cards have different rate limit ranges.

For FE ports on a 6xFE/L2 card, the range is from 200k to 100M, in step of 1k.

On a 2xGE+8xFE/AE card, for FE ports, the range is 64kbps to 100Mbps, in step of 64kbps, while for GE ports, the range is 64kbps to 1000Mbps, also in step of 64kbps. On a single card, up to 8 levels of granularity can be simultaneously supported.

Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications and continue adding VLAN Rate Limit.

Click <OK> to confirm the modifications and quit this window.



Note:

1) The maximum capacity of "port+VLAN" based rate limit table per card is 2k, while for 2×GE+8×FE/A&2×GE+8×FE/AE card, this value is 86.

2) The maximum capacity of "port+VLAN" based rate limit table per NE is 8k.

12.3.3 CoS Configuration In the <LAN Port Property Configuration> window (See Fig. 12.4), check the <Port+VLAN Based> radio button in the <Ingress Cos Configuration> field and the <Port+VLAN Based> button will be available. Click the button, then the <VLAN+Port> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.8)

ii

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 115

Fig. 12.8 VLAN+Port CoS Configuration

All the VLAN CoS information will be displayed in the <VLAN+Port CoS Configuration> window.


Click <Add> to create a new VLAN+Port class of service. (See Fig. 12.9)

Click <Delete> to delete the selected item.

Click <Modify> to modify the selected item.



Fig. 12.9 Add VLAN CoS


116 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

In the <Add VLAN CoS> window, input the VLAN ID in the <VLAN ID> field.

In the <CoS> drop-down menu, select the corresponding rate for this VLAN. There are four classes: <Lowest>, <Low>, <High>, and <Highest>.

Click <Apply> to confirm the modifications and continue adding VLAN Cos.

Click <OK> to confirm the modifications and quit this window.



Note:

1) The maximum capacity of port+VLAN based CoS table per card is 2k, while for 2×GE+8×FE/A and 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, this value is 86.

2) The maximum capacity of port+VLAN based CoS table per NE is 8k.

12.3.4 Egress Priority Weight Configuration In the <LAN Port Property Configuration> window (see Fig. 12.4), there is <Egress Priority Weight Configuration> section.

<Algorithm>: Can be set as <WRR> (weighted round robin) or <Strictly> (strict priority). For a port on 2×GE+8×FE/A and 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, the Algorithm can be set as <WFQ> (Weighted Fair Queuing) or <Scrictly>. Only selecting <WFQ> or <WRR> in the <Algorithm> field, can the <Egress Priority Weight Configuration> field be highlighted.

<Mode>: <Mode1> or <Mode2>.

Note: Egress port mode is related to HOL (Head of Line) issue, which means if incoming frames from different ports are forwarded by an egress port, when the egress port queue is congested (incoming rate is rapid than outgoing rate), we call it HOL issue. When HOL issue is happened, CoS in egress port may have problem under “mode1”, which means in “mode1”, internal HOL function will be disabled, flow control will take effective, but CoS will not be accurate again. In order to solve CoS inaccurate issue, we also support “mode2”, in this mode2, HOL function will be enabled, CoS can be accurate, but flow control function will be disabled, and egress port will discard overflow frames according to CoS priority. Please be notified, the “flow control” function mentioned above is internal flow control in L2 Swtich in which flow control is sent from egress port to all related incoming ports in the same L2 Switch.

Click <Egress Priority Weight Configuration> to enter the <Egress Priority Weight Configuration> window. (See Fig. 12.10 )

ii

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 117

Fig. 12.10 Egress Priority Weight Configuration

Click <Modify> to modify the Priority Weight in a new window.

Click <Refresh> to check the Priority Weight.



For example, to modify one Priority Weight, choose it and click <Modify>, the Modify Priority Weight window will appear. (See Fig. 12.11 ) Fill in the Priority Weight desired and click <Apply>.

Fig. 12.11 Modify Priority Weight

Note: For a 6×FE/L2 or 2×GE+8×FE/A and 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, the valid Priority Weight value ranges from 1 to 240, in step of 1.

12.4 WAN Port Configuration To configure WAN Ports, use the following method to open the <WAN Port Configuration> window:

ii


118 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Select the corresponding Ethernet card, right-click the card, and select <WAN Ports Property Configuration> in the pop-up menu. Then select a port from the <WAN Port Selection> window and click <OK>.

The <WAN Port Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.12)

Fig. 12.12 WAN Port Configuration (1)

When the Ethernet card is transparent card, the <WAN port configuration> window will be different. (See Fig. 12.13)

Fig. 12.13 WAN Port Configuration (2)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 119

The settings of the <Properties>, <Ingress CoS Configuration> and <Egress Priority Weight Configuration> sections in this window are the same as that in the <LAN Port Configuration> window.

When the <Egress Tag Mode> in the <Properties> panel is set as <Tag>, the WAN port can add an outer tag in the frame according to the PVID specified and deliver it to the LAN port.

In the <Bandwidth Management> section, enable or disable LCAS.The user can configurure the bandwidth, or view the summary of virtual containers.

Click <Refresh> to get the latest information about the WAN property.


Click <OK> to confirm the modification with this window closed.



Click <Bandwidth Management>, then the <Bandwidth Mangement> window will be shown. (See Fig. 12.14)

Fig. 12.14 Bandwidth Management

In the <Target> field, the information of Card and Port to be configured is listed.

In the <Direction Configuration field>, select this WAN port's service direction: <bi-direction> or <uni-direction>.

In the <TP Type> field, configure TP Type.

In the <Bandwidth Management> field, the user can set Source and Sink bandwidth


120 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

respectively.

All available TPs are listed in the left column, including TP's series number and status.

Select enough numbers of TPs and click button. All the selected TPs will be

listed in the right column. Click the botton to delete a selected TP.

For example, to set bandwidth to 4Mb, choose VC4-1 and VC4-2 (other AUGs can be

chosen from the left table) by clicking

Note: Different card has different backplane bandwidth. And the number of VCs which can be set on a WAN port is limited. The limitations are listed in the table below.

Card 6×FE/L2 2×GE+8×FE/A and 2×GE+8×FE/AE

8×FE/T 2×GE/T

Backplane Bandwidth of the card

1*VC-4 (shared by 2 FE WAN ports)

8*VC-4 (shared by 1×GE and 31×FE WAN ports)

1*VC-4 (shared by 8 WAN)

16*VC-4 (shared by 2 WAN)

VC12-Xv 1~46*VC12 per WAN port

1~46*VC12 per FE WAN port

1~46*VC12 per WAN port /

VC3-Xv

1~3 VC3 Limitation: EM3+ can not support VC3-Xv and VC12-Xv simultanteously; while EM3-PT can support VC3-Xv and VC12-Xv simultaneously. NE and SNM/LCT wil define related trap to indicate

/

1~3 VC3 Limitation: EM3+ can not support VC3-Xv; while EM3-PT can support VC3-Xv and VC12-Xv. NE and SNM/LCT wil define related trap to indicate

1~21 VC3 for each WAN (1~24 for WAN1, 25~48 for WAN2)

VC4-Xv / 1~7 for GE WAN port

/ 1~7 per WAN port(1~8 for WAN1, 9~16 for WAN2)

Tab. 12.3 Bandwidth limitations for Ethernet cards and WAN ports

Note: For 2×GE/T card, when in slot 1, 2, 5, 6, there are only 4 AU4s, thus 4 VC4, or 4×3 VC3, and all thers VC4 or VC3 are available for either WAN1 or WAN2. When in slot 7,8, there are 16 AU4, thus 16 VC4 or 16×3 VC3, only those VC4 or VC3 in 1-8 AU4 are for WAN1, and VC4 or VC3 in 9-16 for WAN2.

Click <Summary of Virtual Containers> button, then the <Summary of Virtual Containers> window will be shown. (See Fig. 12.15)

ii

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 121

Fig. 12.15 Summary of Virtual Containers

The detailed information about VC assignment is provided in the window.

Click <Refresh> to get the lasted information.

Click <Close> to exit the window.

12.5 WAN Ports TP Structure To open <WAN Ports TP Structure> window:

Right click the Ethernet card, select <WAN Ports TP Structure> in the pop-up menu. (See Fig. 12.16)


122 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 12.16 WAN Ports TP Structure

Different card supports different mapping. And the types of VCs are listed in the table below.

Card 6×FE/L2 2×GE+8×FE/A

and 2×GE+8×FE/AE

8×FE/T 2×GE/T

VCs TUG-3(VC3/VC12) AU-4(VC4/VC12) TUG-3(VC3/VC12) AU-4(VC3/VC4)

Tab. 12.4 Type of VCs for Ethernet cards

Note: For 2xGE/T card VC3 and VC4 can not existed simultaneously.

If you want to map this TP into VC12, select VC12 and click <OK> or <Apply> to put the modification into effect.



12.6 VLAN Management To open the <VLAN Management> window:

Select the corresponding Ethernet card, right-click, and select <VLAN Management> in the pop-up menu.

The <VLAN Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.17)

In the <Query Condition> section, fill in the conditions to narrow the VLAN results that will appear.

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 123

Fig. 12.17 VLAN Management

Note: VLAN range: 2xGE+8xFE/AE card has only 1021 active for costomer simultaneously.

Click <Query>, all VLANs based on the query conditions will show in the list.

Choose one VLAN record; by clicking <VLAN Configuration>, a new window will appear which will enable the VLAN record to be modified. (See Fig. 12.18)

Click <Delete>, to delete the VLAN selected.


Click <Print> to print the VLAN information.


ii


124 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 12.18 VLAN Configuration Based on VLAN

In the <VLAN Management> window opened by clicking the <VLAN Configuration> button, use the <Based on VLAN> tab to reset VLAN ID and VLAN Name, and to select ports.

Click <Apply> to set modifications in the window.




Note: Available VLAN IDs are 1 – 1000 and 1025 – 4094. 0, 1001 – 1024 and 4095 are reserved by system.

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 125

Use the <Based on Ports> tab to modify the VLAN List. (See Fig. 12.19)

Fig. 12.19 VLAN Configuration Based on Ports

Select the Port in the drop-down menu and enter the VLAN ID number in the <VLAN List> field.

When one port belongs to a number of VLANs, the operator can input one of the following syntaxes in the <VLAN List> field:

For a list of VLANs:

- VLANx, VLANy, VLANz, and so on

For a range of VLANs:

- VLANx-VLANz





12.7 Static MAC Address Configuration To configure static MAC Address:

Select the corresponding Ethernet card, right-click, and select <Static MAC Address Configuration> in pop-up menu.

The <Static MAC Address Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.20) The VLAN IDs and Ports of all the MAC Addresses will be listed in this window.


126 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 12.20 Static MAC Address Configuration

Click <Refresh> to get the latest information.

Click <Add> to add a new static MAC address. The <Add Static MAC Address> window will pop up. (See Fig. 12.21)

Select one item and click <Modify> to modify it.

Select one item and click <Delete> to delete it.

Click <Close> to quit the window, all the unsaved settings will be lost.

Click <Print> to print out the information.


Fig. 12.21 Add Static MAC Address


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 127

Input the <MAC Address>, <VLAN ID> and select the corresponding port in the drop-down menu.

Click <Apply> to confirm the action and continue adding other MAC Address.

Click <OK> to confirm the action and close the window.

Click <Close> to quit the window, all unsaved modifications will be lost.


Note:

The maximum capacity of Static MAC address table per card is 2k.

The operator can configure the <VLAN Management> window and the <Static MAC Address Configuration> window independently, which means when the operator configures the ‘Static MAC Address’, the configured item will not be shown in the <VLAN Management> window. But in order to make the Static MAC Address configuration take effective, related VLAN Management must be configured in advance. The port and VLAN relationship should be configured correctly. Otherwise, the Static MAC Address configuration will not take effective even though it is configured successfully.

To modify an MAC Address, select one from the list in the <Static MAC Address Configuration> window, and click <Modify>. A <Modify MAC Address> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.22 )

Fig. 12.22 Modify Static MAC Address

The <MAC Address> and <VLAN ID> field can not be changed. The operator can change the port of the selected MAC Address.

Click <Apply> to confirm the action.


Click <Close> to quit the window, all unsaved modifications will be lost.


12.8 ACL Configuration ACL (Access Control List) is used to manage MAC addresses access, it allows the system drop the packets with the specific “MAC address + VLAN ID” group. Use the following method to open the <ACL Configuration> window:

Select the corresponding Ethernet card, right-click, and select <ACL Configuration> from the popped menu.

The <ACL Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.23)

ii


128 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 12.23 ACL Configuration

To add a new ACL record:

1. Click <Add> to enter <Add ACL> window. (See Fig. 12.24)

2. Input MAC Address and corresponding VLAN ID which need to be filtered out.

3. Click <Apply> to confirm the configuration, a new ACL can be added in <ACL Configuration> window.

To modify ACL record, select corresponding item and click <Modify>.

Fig. 12.24 Add ACL In IEEE mode, if the Source or Destination MAC address of received frames (on 2xGE+8FE/AE card only Source MAC is cared) is equal to MAC address listed in ACL, and the VALN tag which contained in the frames is also equal to VLAN ID listed in ACL, or, the VALN tag which added by NE for the incoming frames without VLAN tag is equal to VLAN ID listed in ACL, these frames will be dropped.

In double tag mode, if the Source or Destination MAC address of received frames (on 2xGE+8FE/AE card only Source MAC is cared) is equal to MAC address listed in ACL ,and VLAN tag which added by NE is also equal to VLAN ID listed in ACL, then these frames will be filtered out.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 129

Note: 1) For a 6×FE/L2 card, the maximum capacity of ACL address table per card is 2k (source MAC and destination MAC altogether), while for 2×GE+8×FE/A and 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, this value is 79.

2) The maximum capacity of static unicast MAC address table (including ACL items) per NE is 8k.

Click <Delete>, the chosen ACL will immediately be deleted.



12.9 Static Multicast Configuration To configure static multicast:

Select the corresponding Ethernet card, right-click, and select <Static Multicast Configuration> from the popped menu.

The <Static Multicast Configuration> window will appear. All MAC Addresses and Port Settings will be listed in this window. (See Fig. 12.25)

Fig. 12.25 Static Multicast Configuration

Click <Refresh> to get the latest information.

Click <Add> to add a new static multicast item. The <Add Static Static Multicast> window will pop up. (See Fig. 12.26)

Select one item and click <Delete> to delete it.

ii


130 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Select one item and click <Modify> to modify it.

Click <Close> to quit the window, all the unsaved settings will be lost.

Click <Print> to print out the information.


Fig. 12.26 Add Static Multicast

Input the MAC Address and VLAN ID for the static multicast group. Then click <Query>, all the ports belonging to this VLAN will be listed in the <Available Ports> panel.

Note: Lowest value of the first byte of multicast address should be 01.

Select ports in the <Available Ports> panel, and click button, to add them to the

<Select Ports> panel. Or select ports in the <Selected Ports> and click button to remove them.

Click <Apply> to confirm the action and continue adding other static multicast MAC Addresses.




Note:

1) The Maximum capacity of multicast MAC address (include static and dynamic) table per card is 24, while for 2×GE+8×FE/A and 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, this value is 254.

2) The Maximum capacity of multicast MAC address (include static and dynamic) table per NE is 8k.

ii

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 131

12.10 IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping indicates dynamic multicast status. The user can retrieve the relationship between the group MAC address, the group IP address and all port members in a specified dynamic multicast group.

Use the following method to open the <IGMP Snooping> window:

Select the corresponding Ethernet card, right-click, and select <IGMP Snooping> from the popped menu.

The <IGMP Snooping> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.27)

Fig. 12.27 IGMP Snooping-IP Multicast Group

In the window, there are three tabs: <IP Multicast Group>, <MAC Multicast Group> and <VLAN Multicast Router>. (See Fig. 12.27, Fig. 12.28 and Fig. 12.29)

Switch between them by using the tabs.


132 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 12.28 IGMP Snooping-MAC Multicast Group

Fig. 12.29 IGMP Snooping- VLAN Multicast Router


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 133

In the window, Select <Enabled> from the <IGMP Snooping> dropdown menu to enable IGMP Snooping. Modify the <Aging Time> options.

<Aging time> indicates the living time of MAC address. Different cards have different aging time range. For a 6×FE/L2 card, and a 2×GE+8×FE/AE card, the range is from 100s to 2000s, in step of 1s;

Click <Refresh> to list the corresponding Multicast Group settings. Click <Cancel> to quit this window without saving any modifications.

12.11 RSTP Configuration Use the following method to open the <RSTP Propery Configuration> window:

Select the corresponding Ethernet card, right-click, and select <RSTP Configuration>.

The <RSTP Property Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 12.30)

Fig. 12.30 RSTP Property Configuration

The window is made up of following two panels: <RSTP Propeties> and <WAN Port RSTP Properties>.

<RSTP Propeties> panel provides the following attributes of the LAN ports:

<MAC Addr>: The bridge's MAC address. It is not changed here.

<Num of Ports>: The number of ports which can run RSTP protocol. Usually the number is equal to the WAN ports’ number of the Ethernet card. It is not changed here.

<Root Port ID>: The serial number of the root port, which is not changed.


134 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

<RSTP Event>: The available values are <Enable> and <Disable>.

<Switch Priority>: The range is from 0 to 61440, in 4096 increments. The default is 32768

<MAX Age>: The living time of this bridge as the RSTP root point. The range is from 6.0s to 40.0s, in 0.1s granularity. The default is 20.0s

<Forward Delay>: The range is from 4.0s to 30.0s, in 0.1s increments. The Default is 15.0s.

<Hello Time>: The value that all bridges use for Hello Time when this bridge is acting as the root. The range is from 1.0s to 10.0s, in 0.1s increments. The default is 2.0s.

In the window, the user can modify the <RSTP Event>, <Switch Priority>, <Max Age>, <Forward Delay>, and <Hello Time> options.

Note: Switch priority for each switch must be different.

Click <Default Values> to set all the above attributes by default.

<WAN Port RSTP Propeties> panel provides the attributes of the WAN ports.

Click <Refresh> to check the real-time port RSTP properties.



Click <Cancel> to quit the window without saving any modifications.

Click <Print> to print the information of RSTP Properties.


Double-click a row in the <WAN Port RSTP Propeties> panel to view and confugure its properties. (See Fig. 12.31)

Fig. 12.31 Port RSTP Configuration

In the window, modify <Port Priority>, <Path Cost>, and set <Port Enable> to Disabled or Enabled. Port Role and Status are for read only.





ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 135

13 RPR Configuration and Management

13.1 RPR Station Configuration To configure an RPR station, right-click an RPR card and select <RPR Station Configuration>. (See Fig. 13.1) The <RPR Station Configuration> window will appear.

Fig. 13.1 Open RPR Station Configuration

13.1.1 RPR Station Basic Configuration After you open the <RPR Station Configuration> window, you will see the <Basic Configuration> panel. (See Fig. 13.2)


136 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 13.2 RPR Station Configuration

The following parameters are listed in this panel and the user can modify these parameters according to his/her needs.

− <Station Label>: Set by operator to identify this station.

− <Ring Label>: The label identifies the ring. It cannot be set by operator in this window.

− <MAC Address>: Input the appropriate MAC address for this RPR Node.

− <Fairness Algorithm>: Available values are <aggressive> or <conservative>.

− <Passthrough Mode>: Available values are <enabled> or <disabled>. If the attribute is set to <enabled>, then the node cannot be auto-discovered in the RPR topology.

− <Keepalive TimeOut>: If no keepalive is received within this time, a signal fail condition is assumed. Range: [2 milliseconds, 200 milliseconds]; Resolution: 1 millisecond; the default value is 5ms (which was 3ms in previous load).

− <Ringlet 0 hops to the station>: The maximum number of hops between this station and ringlet0.

− <Ringlet 1 hops to the station>: The maximum number of hops between this station and ringlet1.

− <Attribute Discovery Timer>: Seperate timer to control frequency with wich station attributes are propagated. The default value is 1 sec, with a range from 50 ms to 10 sec and a granularity of 50 ms.

− <Alarm Monitor>: Available values are <enabled> or <disabled>.

−

Note: User can only modify <Station Label>, <Ring label> and <MAC Address> in this window.

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 137

In the RPR Station Configuration window, the bandwidth setting is in the <Reserved/Pre-Allocated service bandwidth from the station to each ringlet> panel.

The following parameters will be listed in this panel. The user can modify these parameters according to his or her needs.

− <Maximum Bandwidth (Ringlet 0)>: The maximum bandwidth of ringlet0.

− <Maximum Bandwidth (Ringlet 1)>: The maximum bandwidth of ringlet1.

− <Conservative Bandwidth (Ringlet 0): The conservative bandwidth allowed from this station to ringlet0. This value should not exceed the maximum allowed bandwidth of the ringlet0.

− <Conservative Bandwidth (Ringlet 1): The conservative bandwidth allowed from this station to ringlet1. This value should not exceed the maximum allowed bandwidth of the ringlet1.

− <Total Reserved A0 (Ringlet 0)>: The maximum A0 bandwidth allowed to ringlet0.

− <Total Reserved A0 (Ringlet 1)>: The maximum A0 bandwidth allowed to ringlet1.

− <Local Reserved A0 (Ringlet 0)>: The maximum A0 bandwidth allowed from this station to ringlet0. This value should not exceed the maximum allowed bandwidth of service A0 in the ringlet. If the configured bandwidth is larger than bandwidth of the ringlet, the TNMS-M will prompt operator and reject to configure.

− <Local Reserved A0 (Ringlet 1)>: The maximum A0 bandwidth allowed from this station to ringlet1. This value should not exceed the maximum allowed bandwidth of service A0 in the ringlet1. If the configured bandwidth is larger than bandwidth of the ringlet, the TNMS-M will prompt operator and reject to configure.

− <Pre-Allocated A1 (Ringlet 0)>: The maximum A1 bandwidth allowed from this station to ringlet0. This value should not exceed the maximum allowed bandwidth of service A1 in the ringlet. If the configured bandwidth is larger than bandwidth of the ringlet, the TNMS-M will prompt operator and reject to configure.

− <Pre-Allocated A1 (Ringlet 1)>: The maximum A1 bandwidth allowed from this station to ringlet1. This value should not exceed the maximum allowed bandwidth of service A in the ringlet. If the configured bandwidth is larger than bandwidth of the ringlet, the TNMS-M will prompt operator and reject to configure.

− <Pre-Allocated B-CIR (Ringlet 0)>: The maximum B-CIR bandwidth allowed from this station to ringlet0. This value should not exceed the maximum allowed bandwidth of service B- CIR in the ringlet. If the configured bandwidth is larger than bandwidth of the ringlet, the TNMS-M will prompt operator and reject to configure.

− <Pre-Allocated B-CIR (Ringlet 1)>: The maximum B-CIR bandwidth allowed from this station to ringlet1. This value should not exceed the maximum allowed bandwidth of service B-CIR in the ringlet. If configured bandwidth is larger than bandwidth of the ringlet, the TNMS-M will prompt operator and reject to configure.

13.1.2 RPR Station Fairness Configuration In the <RPR Station Configuration> window, click the <Fairness> button to enter <RPR Station Fairness Configuration> window. (See Fig. 13.3)


138 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 13.3 Basic Fairness Configuration

Click <Advanced> to view more options. (See Fig. 13.4) Click <Basic> to return basic configuration.

Fig. 13.4 Advanced Fairness Configuration

The following parameters will be shown in the advanced or basic configuration. These parameters can be modified according to user needs.

− <Ring Label>: The label identifies the ring. It is the same as the parameter used in the Basic Configuration. It cannot be set by operator in this window.

− <Station Label>: The label identifies the station. It is the same as the parameter used in the Basic Configuration. It cannot be set by operator in this window.

− <Ringlet ID>: Available values are <Ringlet 0> and <Ringlet 1>. It is the same as the parameter used in the Basic Configuration.

− <MAC Address>: The MAC address for this RPR Node. It is the same as the parameter used in the Basic Configuration. It cannot be set by operator in this window.

− <Weight>: It is effective for class B and C service. The allowed range is [1, 16]. The default value is 1. It is same as parameter in the Basic Configuration.

− <Maximum Allowed Rate>: The maximum value that the station is allowed to transmit local excess traffic to the ringlet .The default value is the physical ring rate.

− <Advertisement Ratio>: The ratio between the link capacity reserved for fairness control messages and the total link capacity.The range is from 0.00025 to 0.01 with the step of 0.00025. The default value is 0.00125.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 139

− <Age Coefficient>: The allowed range is [0, 4]; the default value is 2.

− <Ramp-up Coefficient>: The allowed values are 1, 2, 3, …, 9.

− <Ramp-down Coefficient>: The allowed values are 1, 2, 3, …, 9.

− <Low-pass Coefficient>: The allowed range is [4, 9]; the default value is 6.

− <Active Weights Coefficient>: Indicates the number of agingIntervals that elapse between successive computations of activeWeights.

− <STQ High Threshold>: It is set by the operator.

− <STQ Medium Threshold>: It is set by the operator.

− <STQ Low Threshold>: It is set by the operator.

Click <Restore Default> to set all parameters to default values.



Click <Refresh> to check the real-time port RSTP properties.



13.1.3 RPR Station OAM Configuration In the <RPR Station Configuration> window, click the <OAM> button to enter <RPR Station OAM Configuration> window. (See Fig. 13.5)

Fig. 13.5 OAM Configuration

The <RPR Station OAM Configuration> window is divided to three panels: Basic Information, <OAM Request>, and <OAM Response>.

The panel on the top of the window lists the basic information:

− <Station Label>: A label that identifies the station. It cannot be set by operator in this window.

− <Ring Label>: A label that identifies this ring. It cannot be set by operator in this window.


140 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

− <MAC Address>: The MAC address for this RPR Node. It cannot be set by operator in this window.

The parameters in the <OAM Request> panel are listed as below:

− <Destination Address>: Shows where the OAM request will be sent.

− <Action Type>: Available values are <echo> or <flush>.

− <Class of Service>: There are three classes of service: <Class A>, <Class B> and <Class C>.

− <Request Ringlet>: The ringlet ID on which the OAM request should be sent.

− <Response Ringlet>: The ringlet ID which answers for the responding request.

− <Request Count>: Shows the number of requests.

− <User Data>: The data sent by the operator with length of the string is 20 bytes.

− <TimeOut>: Available range is from 10ms to 100ms with the step of 10ms.

The parameters in the <OAM Response> panel are listed as below:

− <Response Count>: Shows the number of responses.

− <Response Status>: Available values are <unknown>, <in process>, <error> or <success>.

− <Average Response Time>: Can be set from 0 to 65535.

13.1.4 RPR Station Protection Configuration In the <RPR Station Configuration> window, click the <Station Protection Property> button to enter the <RPR Station Protection Configuration> window. (See Fig. 13.6)

Fig. 13.6 RPR Station Protection Configuration

The following parameters are shown in the <RPR Station Protection Configuration> window:

− <Station Label>: A label that identifies the station. It cannot be set by operator in this window.

− <Ring Label>: A label that identifies this ring. It cannot be set by operator in this window.

− <MAC Address>: The MAC address of this RPR Node. It cannot be set by operator in this window.

− <Protection Mode>: Can be set to <steering>, <wrapping> and <resteering after wrapping>.

− <Reversion Mode>: Indicates whether reversion mode is used. Available values are <yes> and <no>.

− <Wait to Restore Time>: Indicates the length of time to remain in the protection state. The value range is from 0 to 1440 seconds.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 141

13.1.5 RPR Station Span Protection Switch Configuration In the <RPR Station Configuration> window, click the <Span Protection Switch> button to enter the <Span Protection Switch> window. (See Fig. 13.7)

Fig. 13.7 Span Protection Switch

The following parameters are in the <Span Protection Switch> window:

− <Station Label>: A label that identifies the station. It can not be changed in this window.

− <Ring Label>: A label that identifies this ring. It can not be changed in this window.

− <MAC Address>: The MAC address of this RPR Node. It can not be changed in this window.

− <Span ID>: Available values are <East Span> or <West Span>.

− <External Command>: Available values are: <idle>, <manual switch> and <forced switch>. If set to <idle>, no Protection will be used.

− <Hold Off Timer>: It indicates the waiting time before switch. The value is from 0 to 500 milliseconds.

− <Neighbor Protection Status>: Indicates that neighbor protection status is valid or invalid. Available values are <active> and <former>.

− <Protection Count>: The number of times protection that has been used.

− <Protection Duration>: Indicates the amount of time the protection mode lasted.

The following parameters are in the <Protection Status of Span> panel:

− <West Span>: It shows current west span protection status.

− <East Span>: It shows current east span protection status


Click <Apply> to confirm the creation, and continue other creation.

Click <Close> to quit this window.


13.2 RPR Topo Table The <RPR Topo Table> window provides the information about all the RPR rings.

To open the <RPR Topo Table> window, follow the steps below:


142 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Select the corresponding RPR card and then right click the card, and select <RPR Topology Information> from the popped menu.

Then the <RPR Topo Table> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.8)

Fig. 13.8 RPR Topo Table

The window is divided into two sections: <RPR Station> and <Topo Table>.

<Topo Table> section procides the following information of the RPR ring:

- <ringIndex>: The index of RPR ring.

- <MacAddress>: The MAC address of the RPR card.

- <West Mac>: The MAC address of the west station of the RPR ring.

- <East Mac>: The MAC address of the east station of the RPR ring.

Click <Close> to quit this dialog. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.


13.3 RPR Client Port Configuration To open the <RPR Client Port Config> window, follow the steps below:

Select the corresponding RPR card and then right click the card, and select <RPR Client Ports Property Configuration> to open the <RPR Client Port Config> window. Then the operator can specify a unique port by selecting one from the <Port> drop-down menu.

Or select the corresponding port in the RPR card, right-click on it, and select <RPR Client Ports Property Configuration> to open the <RPR Client Port Config> window.

Note: For 2×GE+8×FE/RPRE cards, there are two interfaces on a single physical Ethernet port. In detail, FE Ports 1 and 5 share physical port 1; ports 2 and 6 share port 2; ports 3 and 7 share port 3; ports 4 and 8 share port 4. If the user right-clicks one FE port on such a card and selects <RPR Client Ports Property Configuration> in the pop-up menu, a window will first pop up to let the user choose a specific port before the <RPR Port Configuration> window appears.

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 143

On the panel of a 2×GE+8×FE/RPRE card, there are two LEDs beside each RJ-45 connector, indicating the link and data receiving/transmitting status for the two Ethernet ports on the RJ-45 respectively. For example, as to physical RJ-45 port1, the left LED is used for Ethernet port 5, and the right LED is used for Ethernet port 1. LED “ON” means the link of the Ethernet port is set up, “FLASH” means there are data being received or transmitted, while “OFF” means the link of the Ethernet port is down.

The <RPR Client Port Config> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.9)

Fig. 13.9 RPR Client Port Config

The panel on the top of the window lists the basic information:

− <Ring Label>: The label identifies this ring. It cannot be set by operator in this window.

− <Station Label>: The label identifies the station. It cannot be set by operator in this window.

− <MAC Address>: The MAC address of this RPR Node. It cannot be set by operator in this window.

In the top panel, select the port you want to configure in the <Port> drop-down menu.

In the middle panel, you can view and set the properties of this port:

− <Port Mode>: Available values are <Auto>, <Monitor>, and <Not-Monitor>.

− <Admin Status>: Available values are <Up> and <Down>.

− <Port Type>: <GE Port> or <FE Port>.

− <Auto Laser Shutdown>: Available values are <Yes> and <No>.

− <Port ALS Mode>: Available values are <No Command>, <Manual Restart>, or <Manual Test>.

In the Auto-Negotiation Parameter panel, there are four parameters: <Auto-Negotiation>, <Flow Control>, <Duplex Mode>, <Port Speed>, and <MDI/MDIX Mode>. If <Enabled> is


144 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

selected in the <Auto-Negotiation> field, the other four parameters will be greyed out. If not, these three parameters need to be setup manually.

The status of the port will be displayed in the <Port Status> panel.

Note: For a 2×GE+8×FE/RPRE card, the supported maximum frame size is 1897 Bytes and the dynamic MAC address table size is 8K (for attached L2 Bridge).



Click <OK> to confirm the modification if you want this window closed.

Click <Close> to quit this dialog. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.


13.4 RPR WAN Port Configuration To configure RPR WAN Ports, use the following method to open the <RPR WAN Port Config> window:

Select the RPR card, right-click this card, and select <RPR WAN Ports Property Configuration> in the pop-up menu.

Then the <RPR WAN Port Config> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.10)

Fig. 13.10 RPR WAN Port Config

Select the WAN port you want to configure from the <Port> drop-down menu.

Select the alarm monitor type from the <Alarm Monitored> drop-down menu. Available values are <Monitor> and <Non-monitor>.

In the <Bandwidth Configuration> panel, click the <BandWidth Configuration> button for detailed setting. The <BandWidth Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.11)

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 145

Fig. 13.11 Bandwidth Configuration

In the <Bandwidth Configuration> window simply choose from the available AUGs in the

<Available AUGs> window and click button to move them to the <Selected AUGs> panel.


Click <OK> to confirm the modification with this window closed.



Note: 1) So far, only bidirection is supported.

2) The backplane bandwidth of a 2×GE+8×FE/RPRE card is 16*VC-4. Each WAN can has 1 – 8*VC-4.

3) Before creating RPR traffic, bandwidth should be configured first. VC4 (#1~#8) should be assigned to west WAN port and VC4 (#9~#16) is for east WAN port. If user want to configure N*VC4 as traffic bandwidth, the N*VC4 must be selected continuously. VC4 (#1~#N) must be selected for west WAN port and VC4 (#9~#8+N) must be selected for east WAN port.

To increase the bandwidth of RPR traffic, for example adding a VC4 into the N*VC4 traffic, users must add VC4 (#N +1) into west WAN port and VC4 (#8+N+1) into east WAN port.

ii


146 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

13.5 RPR Static Multicast configuration In static multicast configuration, user can attach many client ports of one station to one MAC address, and perform multicast. To configure group broadcast, select the RPR card, right-click this card, and select <RPR Static Multicast configuration>. The <Static Multicast Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.12)

Fig. 13.12 Static MultiCast Configuration

All MAC addresses flow ID and port sets will be listed in this window.

To delete a MAC Address, select the corresponding MAC address and click <Delete>.

Click <Modify> to modify the selected MAC address in the <Add/Modify Static Multicast> window.

To add a new MAC Address, click <Add>. The <Add/Modify Static Multicast> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.13)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 147

Fig. 13.13 Add/Modify Static MultiCast

Input the MAC address to be added in the <MAC Address> field. Input the flow id in the <Flow ID> field.

Select the port in the <Available Ports> panel, and click button to add it to the

<Selected Ports> panel. Select the port in the <Selected Ports> panel, and click button to remove it from the <Selected Ports> panel.


Click <OK> to close this window and return to the <Group Broadcast Config> window.



13.6 RPR Service Configuration Select <RPR> <RPR Service Configuration> to launch the <RPR Service Configuration> window. (See Fig. 13.14)


148 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 13.14 RPR Service Configuration

There are two panels in the window: <Basic Information> and <Add Station>.

13.6.1 Basic Information In the Basic Information panel has the following parameters:

− <Ring Label>: Select one of the current rings in the dropdown menu.

− <Service Label>: Input a number to identify this service.

− <Service Class>: Includes three levels. The priority follows the order: <A>, <B>, <C>.

− <Service ID>: Input the flow ID of this RPR service. Maximum 511 service flows are allowed in each NE.

− <Service Mode>: Includes two modes <P2P> and <MP2MP>.

− <Wrap Protection>: Available values are <enable> and <disable>. If the protection mode of ring is steering, the attribute can be ignored, which means service will always be protected according to steering protection. If the protection mode of ring is wrapping, when the value is “Disabled”, the service will not be protected; when the value is “Enabled”, the service will be protected according to wrap mode.

− <Ringlet>: Indicates which ring supports this service. For multi-point to multi-point service, ringlet should be the same. For point to point service, ringlet from node A to Z and ringlet from node Z to A can be selected separately. And it is not common attributes for point to point service.

13.6.2 Add Station After you configure the basic information, click <Configuration> to add a new station to this service. The <Add RPR Service> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.15)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 149

Fig. 13.15 Add RPR Service

All available stations are listed in left panel. Select stations and click <Add>. Then the <RPR Service Station Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.16)

Fig. 13.16 RPR Service Station Configuration

Set the following attributes:

− <Servie Type>: There are three types, <Port Based>, <Port + VLAN Based> and <Port+VLAN+Prio Based>. Different station’s service type in one service can be different.

− <Client VID>: This attribute is only effective when service type is “Port+VLAN based” or “Port+VLAN+Priority based”. The Client VID may not be same in different stations which are belonged to the service.


150 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

− <Maximum Bandwidth>: Indicate how much bandwidth this service can occupy.

Click button to enter detail setting. The Rate Limit List Pre-Configuration window will be shown. (See Fig. 13.17)

− <Remote MAC>: A remote MAC address (only for P2P service mode).

− <Client Port>: Local Ethernet port. Multiple client ports in one station can be selected (if selected, they will belong to same broadcast domain no matter what customer VLAN ID is).

− <Ringlet>: The ringlet which carries the service.

− <Client Priority>: This attribute is only effective when service type is “Port+VLAN+Priority based”. The Client Priority may not be same in different stations which are belonged to the service.

Note:

a) If a port has been added into a service and the service type is port-based, then any “port+VLAN” or “port+VLAN+priority” based service (in which the port has been added into a service) can NOT be provided, and there is a prompt information.

b) If a port has been used by a service (the service type is “port+VLAN”-based), then any “port” based service (in which the port has been used by a service) can NOT be provided, and there is prompt information.

Fig. 13.17 Rate Limit Pre-Configuration

The <Rate Limit List> table shows the current Rate Limit setting. You can modify current rate limit setting or add new one in the <Add or Modify Rate Limit> panel.

Note: For each RPR card (station), only 8 levels supported. And for same service flow, all rate of different client ports in different RPR stations should be same, and the rate must has been pre-defined in all RPR stations, if some RPR stations have not define the rate, system will prompt operator to define it in advance.

− To Add a Rate Limit:

ii

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 151

1. Select one Rate Limit Index from 1 to 8 and input corresponding limited rate which unit is kb/s. Those numbers which are already occupied cannot be used.

2. Click <OK> to add a new rate limit item. Every station can have 8 rate limit levels.

− To Modify a Rate Limit:

1. Select the rate limit index and input new limited rate.

2. Click <OK> and confirm this modify. Make sure that the rate limit to be modified is not in use.

Click <OK> to confirm your modify and quit this window.

Click <Close> to close this window.

Click <Help> to enter online help.

After you configure the <Add RPR Service> window, the information of the added station will be shown in the <Add Station> panel in the <RPR Service Configuration> window.

To delete stations in the <Add RPR Service> window, select the stations you want to delete in the <Selected Stations> panel, and then click <Delete>. Click <OK> to confirm your setting and close this window.

Click <Close> to close this window without save any configuration.


13.7 RPR Service Management To manage RPR service, select <RPR> <RPR Service Management> from the main menu to launch the <RPR Service Management> window. (See Fig. 13.18)

Fig. 13.18 RPR Service Management

In the <RPR Service Management> window, select the corresponding attributes in the <Query Attribute> panel. Then click <Query>. The RPR services with those attributes will be listed in the <RPR Service List> table. (See Fig. 13.19)


152 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 13.19 RPR Service Management- Query reslut

To delete a service, select one item in the <RPR Service List> table and click <Delete>.

Note: If a service has been impacted or interrupted, the corresponding row in the list will be marked with a yellow background

13.7.1 Service Detail To view more information about this service or modify this service setting, select one item in the <RPR Service List> table, and click <Detail>. The <Service Detail> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.20)

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 153

Fig. 13.20 Service Detail

The Service Detail window is divided to two panels: <Basic Information> and <Add Station>.

In the <Basic Information> panel, the following parameters can be set:

− <Ring Label>: Select one of the current rings in the dropdown menu.

− <Service Label>: Input a number to identify this service.

− <Service Class>: Includes three levels with priorities in order: <A>, <B>, <C>.

− <Service ID>: Input the flow id of this RPR service. Maximum 511 service flows are allowed in each NE.

− <Service Bandwidth>: Indicates how much bandwidth this service can occupy. For class A service, the maximum bandwidth cannot exceed the current available bandwidth in reserved partition.

− <Service Mode>: Includes two modes- <P2P> and <MP2MP>.

− <Wrap Eligible>: Available values are <enable> and <disable>. If the protection mode of ring is steering, the attribute can be ignored, which means service will always be protected according to steering protection. If the protection mode of ring is wrapping, when the value is “Disable”, the service will not be protected; when the value is “Enable”, the service will be protected according to wrap mode.

− <TTL0>: Indicate this service’s living time of Ring0.

− <TTL1>: Indicate this service’s living time of Ring1.


Click <Configuration> to modify the RPR service.




154 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

13.7.2 Modify RPR Service After you configure the basic information in the <Service Detail> window, click <Configuration> to modify this service. The <Modify RPR Service> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.21)

Fig. 13.21 Modify RPR Service

All available stations are listed in left panel. You can select stations and click <Add>. Then the <RPR Service Station Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.22)


Set the following attributes:

− <Client Port>: Local Ethernet port

− <Service Type>: There are three types, <Port Based>, <Port + VLAN Based> and <Port+VLAN+Prio Based>.

− <Client VID>: This attribute is only effective when service type is “Port+VLAN based” or


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 155

“Port+VLAN+Priority based”. The Client VID may not be same in different stations which are belonged to the service.

− <Client Priority>: This attribute is only effective when service type is “Port+VLAN+Priority based”. The Client Priority may not be same in different stations which are belonged to the service.

− <Service Bandwidth>: Indicates how much bandwidth this service can occupy. Click

button to enter a detailed setting. The <Rate Limit List Pre-Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 13.17 and related descriptions)

Note: If in one RPR station, all 8 rates have been used, and if operator wants to change a service flow rate, system will prompt operator that all available 8 rates have been used. And if operator wants to continue operation, he must delete a pre-defined rate.

To delete stations in the <Modify RPR Service> window, select the stations to be deleted in the <Selected Stations> panel, and then click <Delete>. Click <OK> to confirm your setting and close this window.

Click <Close> to close this window without save any configuration.


ii


156 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

14 Protection Management TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT supports CC 1+1 protection, Equipment protection, SNCP, MSP, and MS-SPRing management.

14.1 CC 1+1 Protection Open the chassis view of an NE, in this configuration it will have 2 CC or CC_LC cards. From the main menu, select <Configuration> <CC 1+1 Protection>. The <CC 1+1 Protection> window will appear. (See Fig. 14.1)

Fig. 14.1 CC 1+1 Protection

The status of the two CC or CC_LC cards, CC1 and CC2, are displayed in the upper panel.

Note: The <Latch State> indicates the status of the latches on the CC or CC_LC card. If the operator unlatches the card to pull it out from the shelf, the <Latch State> will become <Latch Open> and working card will be switched to the other CC or CC_LC card. Meanwhile, the words “Latch Open” will appear beside the bottom of the card in chassis view. If the operator latches the card to pull it onto the shelf, the <Latch State> will become <Latch Close> and the card start work. Meanwhile, the word “Operational” will appear beside the bottom of the card in chassis view.

Note: Make sure the CC or CC_LC cards are in “Latch Close” state before plugging out.

And user must make sure the card which will be pulled out has no FS command set on it.

Note: CC_LC is a kind of CC card with a STM-16 photonic port on it. Both CC card and CC_LC card can be operated separately. In CC_LC’s card property configuration, CC_LC’s working mode can be switched between 1×STM16 and 1×STM4 if there is no protection or timing sources on it.

In the <Switch Request> drop-down menu, select the corresponding command including: <Clear>, <Force switch to CC1>, <Force switch to CC2>, <Manual switch to CC1> and <Manual switch to CC2>.

ii

ii

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 157

Click <Apply> to execute the switch request.

Click <Refresh> to view the latest information.



14.2 Equipment Protection TNMS-M SURPASS hit 7060 LCT provides 1+1 equipment protection for E3/DS3 application and electrical STM-1board. 1+1 Protection is to enhance the system reliability. It consists of one protection resource for taking the role of the working resource of the same type in case of fault conditions or Element Management System (EMS) requests. Equipment protection is made at a card basis. It’s used against the card removal and the card failure. In other words, there must be two same function cards available on NE at the same time.

Meantime, Equipment Protection provides 1: N protection for E1 application, which consists of one protection card and N working cards.

Note: For 1: N protection, in the normal state, the protection card can also provide extra traffic service of lower priority. When the protection switching happens, the lower-priority service will be dropped.

14.2.1 1+1 Equipment Protection

To open the corresponding Equipment Protection Management window, select <Configuration>→<1+1 Equipment Protection Management> or <1: N Equipment Protection Management> from the main menu. A new <Equipment Protection Group Management> (EPG) window will appear. (See Fig. 14.2)

Fig. 14.2 Equipment Protection Group Management

Click <Refresh> to see current EPG status. All existed EPG will be listed in the window.

ii


158 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Select one EPG and Click <Command> to enter the <EPG External Command> window. (See Fig. 14.3)

Fig. 14.3 EPG External Command

In the <EPG Properties> panel, all current properties about this EPG will appear. In the <External Command> panel, select the external command in the external command dropdown menu.

All external commands are listed as below:

<clear>: this command clears all of the externally initiated switch commands and WTR at the node to which the command is addressed.

<lockout of Protection>(LP): prevents the selector from switching to the protection 63xE1.

<force switch to protection>(FS-P): switches the selector from the working slot (x) 63xE1 to the protection 63xE1.

<force switch to working>(slot (x) 63xE1 FS-Wx): switches the selector from the protection 63xE1 to the working slot (x) 63xE1. The FS-Wx command is unique only in 1+1 non-revertive systems, since the LP command would produce the same effect on a revertive system.

<manual switch to protection>(MS-P): switches the selector from the working 63xE1 (x) to the protection 63xE1.

<manual switch to working>(slot (x) MS-Wx)>: switches the selector from the protection 63xE1 to the working slot (x) 63xE1 The MS-W command is unique only in 1+1 non-revertive systems, since the clear command would produce the same effect on a revertive system.

The priority of those external commands is down in order.

Click <Refresh> to view current status.

Click <Apply> to confirm your change.

In the <EPG Management> window, select one EPG and click <Detail> to see the detail information of the EPG properties. (See Fig. 14.4)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 159

Fig. 14.4 See detail of EPG

Click <Refresh> to get the latest version of EPG.

Click <Enable> to enable the EPG.

Click <Close> to quit window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.


To delete this EPG, select it in the <EPG Management> window and select <Delete>. In the later pop up window, confirm the deleting action.

To add a new EPG, click <Create> button in the <EPG Management> window. The <Create EPG> window will appear. (See Fig. 14.5)

Fig. 14.5 Create EPG

After inputting or selecting parameters in corresponding blanks, click <Create> to create this EPG.



160 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619


14.2.2 1:N Equipment Protection

TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT provides 1: N equipment protection for 63xE1 application, which consists of one protection card and N working cards.

Note: hiT7060 R4.1 only supports 63xE1 retiming card.

To open the corresponding Equipment Protection Management window, select <Configuration>→<1: N Equipment Protection Management>from the main menu. A new <1: N Equipment Protection Group Management> (EPG) window will appear. (See Fig. 14.6)

Fig. 14.6 1: N Equipment Protection Group Management

Click <Refresh> to see current EPG status. All existed EPG will be listed in the window.

Select one EPG and Click <Command> to enter the <EPG External Command> window. (See Fig. 14.7)

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 161

Fig. 14.7 1: N EPG External Command

In the <EPG Properties> panel, all current properties about this EPG will appear. In the <External Command> panel, select the external command in the external command dropdown menu.

All external commands are listed as below:

<clear>: this command clears all of the externally initiated switch commands and WTR at the node to which the command is addressed.

<lockout of Protection>(LP): prevents the selector from switching to the protection 63xE1.

<force switch to protection>(FS-P): switches the selector from the working slot (x) 63xE1 to the protection 63xE1.

<force switch to working>(slot (x) 63xE1 FS-Wx): switches the selector from the protection 63xE1 to the working slot (x) 63xE1. The FS-Wx command is unique only in 1+1 non-revertive systems, since the LP command would produce the same effect on a revertive system.

<manual switch to protection>(MS-P): switches the selector from the working 63xE1 (x) to the protection 63xE1.

<manual switch to working>(slot (x) MS-Wx)>: switches the selector from the protection 63xE1 to the working slot (x) 63xE1. The MS-W command is unique only in 1+1 non-revertive systems, since the clear command would produce the same effect on a revertive system.

The priority of those external commands is down in order.

Click <Refresh> to view current status.


In the <1: N Equipment Protection Management> window, select one EPG and click <Modify> to Modify the detail information of the EPG properties. (See Fig. 14.8)


162 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 14.8 See detail of 1: N EPG

Click <Refresh> to get the latest version of EPG.




To delete this EPG, select it in the <1: N Equipment Protection Management> window and select <Delete>. In the later pop up window, confirm the deleting action.

To add a new EPG, click <Create> button in the <1: N Equipment Protection Management> window. The <Create EPG> window will appear. (See Fig. 14.9)

Fig. 14.9 Creat 1: N EPG

After inputting or selecting parameters in corresponding blanks, click <Create> to create this EPG.



14.3 SNCP Management To open the <SNCP Management> window, select <Configuration> <SNCP Management> in the main menu.

The <SNCP Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 14.10)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 163

Fig. 14.10 SNCP Management

14.3.1 Viewing and Modifying SNCP The <Conditions> section in the <SNCP Management> window allows setting the conditions of querying the SNCP database. The querying conditions include Label, Card, Port, Capacity, and Direction. Type in the Label of the SNCP to be searched; for the other parameters (Capacity, Card, Direction and Port), use the drop-down menu provided to set parameters. Click <Query> to start searching the database. The results will appear as shown in the table below.

The SNCPs and their properties will appear in the table.

Double-click an SNCP or select one SNCP then click <View/Modify> to view and modify it. (See Fig. 14.11)


164 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 14.11 View/Modify SNCP

The SNCP Properties supported are listed in Tab. 14.1 below. Items Description

Capacity The transmission capacity. It cannot be modified in the View/Modify window

Direction The transmission direction. It cannot be modified in the View/Modify window.

Restore Mode The restore mode of this protection plan which includes Revertive and Non-Revertive.

Wait To Restore The time interval waited for restore. This number must be between 60 ms and 720 ms. the step is 1 ms; if item Direction is source, then WTR cannot be modified in the View/Modify window.

Label A label chosen by the user to help the users remember SNCPs conveniently

Hold off Time The time to hold off. This time must be between 0 ms and 100*100ms, step is 100ms. If item Direction is source, then it cannot be modified in the View/Modify window.

Intrusive Mode It can be SNC/I or SNC/N.It cannot be modified in the View/Modify window.

Tab. 14.1 SNCP Properties

<Source/Destination TP> denotes the SNCP source/destination TP.

Select the current working TP, including its working card, port, and TP. This cannot be modified in the <View/Modify> window.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 165

<Protection TP> – Select the protection TP, including its protecting card, port, and TP. This cannot be modified in <View/Modify> window.




14.3.2 Creating SNCP In the <SNCP Management> window, click <Create> to create a new SNCP. (See Fig. 14.12)

Fig. 14.12 Create SNCP

14.3.3 Deleting SNCP In the <SNCP Management> window click <Delete> to delete the selected SNCP.


166 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 14.13 Delete SNCP

14.3.4 Switching SNCP

Click <Switch> in the <SNCP Management> window to switch SNCP. The <SNCP Switch> window will appear (See Fig. 14.14).

Fig. 14.14 SNCP Switch

Select a command in the <Command List>: Clear, LockOut, Force Switch to Protection, Force Switch to Working, Manual Switch to Protection, and Manual Switch to Working.


Click <Apply> to start switch.



14.4 MSP Management To open the <MSP Management> window:


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 167

From the main menu, select <Configuration> <MSP Management>.

The <MSP Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 14.15)

Fig. 14.15 MSP Management

Input conditions in the <Query Condition> panel, including: <Group Id>, and <Label>. Select options in the drop-down menus, including: <Switch Direction>, <Operation Mode>, and <Card>.

Click <Query> to query the MSP protection.

Click <Create> to create linear Multiplex Section Protection Group.

Click <Delete> to delete an existing linear Multiplex Section Protection Group.

Click <View/Modify> to view or modify MSP property. (See Fig. 14.19)

Click <Switch> to switch working MS with Protection MS. (See Fig. 14.20)


Click <Print> to print the querying result of the MSP protection.


14.4.1 Create MSP In the <MSP Management> window, click <Create> to create a new protection. The <Create Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group> window will appear.


168 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 14.16 Create Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group

Input <Protection Group Label> and <Wait to Restore> in the corresponding fields and select other options in the drop-down menus.

Click <OK> to create MS Protection and close the window.



14.4.2 Delete MSP In the <MSP Management> window, select one MSP item and click <Delete> to delete the selected MSP. (See Fig. 14.17)

Fig. 14.17 Delete MSP

Then a confirmation window will appear. (See Fig. 14.18)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 169

Fig. 14.18 Confiramtion window

Click <Yes> to delete the MSP group.

Click <No> to cancel the operation.

14.4.3 View/Modify MSP In the <MSP Management> window, select one MSP item and click <View/Modify> to view or modify the MSP. Then the <MSP Property> window will be shown. (See Fig. 14.19)

Fig. 14.19 MSP Property

The <MSP Property> window includes the following properties: <Protection Group ID>, <Protection Group Label>, <Working Card>, <Working Port>, <Protection Card>, <Protection Port>, <Protection Type>, <Switch Direction>, <Operation Mode>, and <Wait to Restore>.

14.4.4 Switch MSP In the <MSP Management> window, select one MSP, and click <Switch> to start the operation. The <External Commands> window will appear. (See Fig. 14.20)


170 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 14.20 External Commands

The <Local MSP Status> section includes: <Active Path>, <Working MS>, <Protection MS>, <The Current Request>, and <Switch Reason>.

In the <Commands> drop-down menu, select one command and click <Apply> to operate this command. This window will not be closed.



Click <OK> to operate this command and quit the window.



14.5 MS-SPRing Management LCT provides the function of creating and viewing MS-SPRing information.

To open the <MS-SPRing Management> window:

From the main menu, click <Configuration> <MS-SPRing Management>. The <MS-SPRing Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 14.21)

Fig. 14.21 MS-SPRing Management


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 171

Click <Query> to get the current MS-SPRing information. Exsisting MS-SPRings will be listed in the table, with the following parameters: <Ring ID>, <Ring Name>, <Ring Type>, <Protection>, and <Number of NEs>.

Click <Print> to print the information of the MS-SPRing.



14.5.1 Creating MS-SPRing Before the user creates a new MS-SPRing, he must know the ring topology and link information about this NE.

Follow the steps below to create a new ring with MS-SRPing Protection:

In the <MS-SPRing Management> window, click <Create>. The <Create Ring> window will appear. (See Fig. 14.22)

Fig. 14.22 Set Ring Property

Input a number as <NE Number in the Ring>, a number as <Ring ID> and arbitrary string as <Ring Name>. The ring type can be set as <STM4> or <STM16>. Click <OK> to set the NEs in the ring.

Note: The maximum number of the ring is 16, and the Ring ID should be a number between 1 and 5000. The Ring ID is unique, so it can not be duplicated wtih Ring ID which has been created before. If the information is incorrect or some items are not inputted, a warning window will appear. (See Fig. 14.23)

Fig. 14.23 Warning Window

A new window will appear. A serial of numbered NEs will appear on the window, the total number of which equals the number that the user input in the previous window. (See Fig. 14.24)

ii


172 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 14.24 Create MS-SPRing and Link Configuration

Click the icon of each NE following the sequence of their serial number. Input NE’s Node IP address and click <OK>. (See Fig. 14.25) This NE will be added in ring.

Note: The NE managed in current LCT software must be added; otherwise the next step will not be available.

Fig. 14.25 Set NEs in Ring

Click each of the links to set up the Link Port properties in the pop-up dialog. Choose the link port, input slot number and port number of peer link port in the pop-up dialog. The color of the corresponding link will turn green.

Fig. 14.26 Create Ring-Select Link

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 173

When all the NEs and links are configured, click <OK>, and a confirmation dialog will pop up. (See Fig. 14.27)

Fig. 14.27 Create MS-SPRing Confirming

Click <Yes> to add protection to the ring and return to the Ring Management window.

Click <No> to add protection later.

Now the ring just created will appear in the <Ring list> field. (See Fig. 14.28)

Fig. 14.28 Create MS-SPRing Created

14.5.2 Delete a Ring

To delete an existing ring, select it in the <Ring List> table and click <Delete>.


174 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Note: Delete MS-SPRing in <MS-SPRing Management> wondow, it will delete the MS-SPRing information in NE’s MIB immediately, however, delete protection in <MS-SPRing Property> window, it only deletes the ring entity in the SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT database.

14.5.3 Ring Property

To see the ring properties, click <Property> in the <MS-SPRing Management> window and the ring properties window will appear.

There are four tabs in this window:

<Protection Details> Tab (See Fig. 14.29)

Fig. 14.29 Ring Properties- Protection Details

In the <Protection Details> tab, there are two groups: <Protection Property> and <Configuration>.

The <Protection Property> table lists all the NEs included by this MS-SPRing and the status of corresponding ports.

- <Node ID>: The ID of included NE.

- <NE Address>: The IP address of NE.

- <East Port>: The east card and port which are connected in the ring.

- <West Port>: The west card and port which are connected in the ring.

- <Status>: The current status of the MS-SPRing. There are four statuses as below:

- <Idle>: A network element is in the idle state when it is not sending or receiving any APS requests or bridge request, and it is receiving Idle or ET codes from both directions.

- <Pass-through>: A network element is in the pass-through state when its highest priority of APS request is a bridge request which is not destined to or sourced by it.

- <Switch>: A status between idle and pass-through state. This includes the default signalling status, e.g. node start-up, when there is no ring map available.

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 175

- <Isolate>: A network element is in the isolate state when both the east and west port are cut off.

For the local NE, the default value of this field is N/A, while for others, it is <Idle>.

- <Enable>: <Enable> or <Disable>.

- <Suspend>: <Suspend> or <Unsuspend>.

In the <Configuration> group, you can modify <Ring Name> and set <WTR> (Wait To Restore Time), and select <NUT> ports. (Note that the NUT configuration just can be changed while MS-SPRing is disabled.)

Check <Auto Mapping> to map TP structure of peer NE. Note that if <Auto Mapping> is checked, then the buttons in the <Mapping> tab will be greyed out.

Check <Auto Squelch> to enable auto-squelch. Note that if <Auto Squelch> is checked, then the buttons (create, view/modify, delete) in the <Squelch> tab will be greyed out.

Click <Delete Protection> and select <Yes> in the pop-up dialog to delete protection from the MS-SPRing. All the other buttons and tabs will be greyed out, and this button will become <Add Protection>. Click the button to re-add protection onto the MS-SPRing.

Click <Enable MS-SPRing> and select <Yes> in the pop-up dialog to change the MS-SPRing Enable status to “Enable”. Then the button will become Disable MS-SPRing. Click the button to change the MS-SPRing Enable status to “Disable”.

Click <Suspend MS-SPRing> and select <Yes> in the pop-up dialog to suspend the MS-SPRing. Then the button will become Unsuspend MS-SPRing and switch tab is gray out. Click the button to un-suspend the MS-SPRing.

<Switch> Tab (See Fig. 14.30)

Fig. 14.30 Ring Properties- Switch

Click the Switch tab to view switch information and perform switch commands.

There are two sub-tabs, <East Side> and <West Side>. They are responsible for execution of east and west external command respectively.

After select side, click command in <Command> dropdown menu.


176 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

<Clear>: Clears the externally initiated command and WTR at the node to which the command was addressed. The NE-to-NE signaling following removal of the externally initiated commands is performed using the NR code.

<LockOut Protection>: Prevents the ring wraps anywhere for any protection activity and prevents using ring switches anywhere in the ring. If any ring switches exist in the ring, this command causes the switches to drop. If there is a span switch for this span, it is dropped. Thus, all ring switching is prevented (and pre-empted), and span switching is prevented only on the locked-out span.

<Forced Switching Ring>: Performs the ring switch for normal traffic from the working channels to the protection channels for the span between the node at which the command is initiated and the adjacent node to which the command is destined. This switch occurs regardless of the state of the protection channels, unless the protection channels are satisfying a higher priority bridge request.

<Manual Switching Ring>: Performs the ring switch for the normal traffic from the working channels to the protection channels for the span between the node at which the command is initiated and the adjacent node to which the command is destined. This switch occurs if the protection channels are not in an SD condition and are not satisfying an equal or higher priority bridge request (including failure of the protection channels).

<Exercise>: Exercise ring command is used to check whether the MS-SPRing ring in “idle” status can switch normally or not and will not switch traffic. After users execute the command on one NE by LCT, users will receive an information window that informs users “Operation succeeded”; it just means the command has been sent to NE successfully,users should check the current ring status to verify whether the MS-SPRing ring works normally or not. If the ring can switch normally, the result should be: two NEs are in “Switch” status (Actually you execute the command in one span of the ring, two NEs on its two ends should be in “Switch” status) and other NEs are in “Pass though” status. If the ring is in other status, it means the ring cannot switch normally.

The priority of the EXER ring command is lowest. If higher request exists in the ring, for example, FS-W, MS-W, Signal fail etc, LCT will inform you that NE refuses to execute the command. On the other hand, after the command is executed successfully, it will remain in NE until higher priority request happens, generally you should execute “CLEAR” command to clear it after you check the result.

Click <Apply> to perform this command.

In the sub-tab, the corresponding status information will be listed.

<Current Command>: The highest priority command under performing.

<Line Request>: The request message coming from link.

<Last Switch Reason>: Reason of last switch action.

<Mapping> Tab (See Fig. 14.31)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 177

Fig. 14.31 Ring Properties- Mapping

Click the Mapping tab to view Auto Mapping Configuration.

Select NE from the drop-down menu and click <Query> to query Auto Mapping Configuration.

In below window, the TP structure of peer NE port used by MS-SPRING is shown. You can change the mapping manner via right clicking selected TP when auto mapping is disabled.

<Squelch> Tab (See Fig. 14.32)

Fig. 14.32 Ring Properties- Squelch

The following seven attributes are listed out in the tab: <TimeSlot>, <Side>, <Order>, <Direction>, <Type>, <Source>, and <Sink>.

Click <Query> to get latest information.


178 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Click <Create> to add a new squelched cross connection.

Click <Property> to view and modify the squelched cross connection.

Click <Delete> to delete selected squelched cross connection.

Click <Close> to quit this dialog.


If <Auto Squelch> in the <Protection Details> tab is unchecked, the following buttons are available: <Create>, and <View/Modify>.

Select one item in the list, and click <View/Modify> to see the detailed node squelch information. (See Fig. 14.33)

Fig. 14.33 View/Modify Node Squelch Information

<NE>: IP address of the node.

<TimeSlot>: The time slot of the node.

<Side>: It may be <East> or <West>.

<Direction>: It may be <RX> or <TX>.

<Order>: It may be <High Order> or <Low Order>.

<Type>: It may be <Add>, or <Pass Through>.

<Source>: From 0 to 15.

<Sink>: From 0 to 15.

Click <Create> to create new node squelch information. (See Fig. 14.34)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 179

Fig. 14.34 Create Node Squelch Information

14.5.4 Add/Delete NE

1. Add an NE into MS-SPRing ring on LCT

Apply FS command on both sides of the span between two NEs where user want to add a new NE.

Suspend MS-SPRing in all NEs.

Plug out the fibers and add the new NE into ring.

Create coresponding CCs on the new added NE if some traffic is running on the span.

Unsuspend MS-SPRing in all NEs.

Clear the FS command on the span.

Delete all NE’s MS-SPRing.

Create new MS-SPRing in normal way.

2. Delete NE from MS-SPRing ring on LCT

Apply FS command on ring sides connected to NE which need to be deleted.

Suspend MS-SPRing in all NEs.

Remove the NE and reconnect the fibers.

Unsuspend MS-SPRing in all NEs.

Clear two FS commands in the ring.

Delete all NE’s MS-SPRing.

Create new MS-SPRing in normal way.


180 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

15 DCN Management

15.1 Change NE IP There are two ways to change NE IP address of an existing node:

• Select <DCN> <Change NE IP>,

• Right click NE and select <Change NE IP> in the pop-up menu.

A new window will appear. (See Fig. 15.1)

Fig. 15.1 Change NE IP

Input the new IP Address of the NE.

Click <OK> to confirm the modifications, or select <Cancel> to quit this window.

Note: NE’s node IP address is used as the label of node in MS-SPRing ring, if there is MS-SPRing ring configured in NE, users must set MS-SPRing status as idle and delete the MS-SPRing on the NE first before changing the Node IP address, then can create the MS-SPRing on the NE once again.

15.2 Change Ethernet IP Use the following method to change the Ethernet IP address of an existing node:

Select <DCN> <Change Ethernet IP>.

Then the <Configure Ethernet IP> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.2)

Fig. 15.2 Configure Ethernet IP

Input the new IP information of the NE, including <New IP address>, <New Subnet Mask> and <New Gateway>.

Click <OK> to confirm the modifications, or select <Cancel> to quit this window.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 181

15.3 DCC Management In the <Port DCC Management> window, user can query current the DCC status of every SDH port.

To open the <Port DCC Management> window, select <DCN>→<DCC Management> from the main menu.

The <Port DCC Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.3)

Fig. 15.3 Port DCC Management

In the list, every row corresponds to one SDH port with following properties:

<Card>: Specifies the corresponding card name and slot.

<Port>: Port type.

<MS DCC Mode>: Specifies the current MS DCC mode. Click this unit to change its value to either <Enabled> or <Disabled>.

<MS DCC Protocol>: Specifies the current MS DCC protocol, including <HDLC>, <OSI>, <PPP> or <GRE Tunnel>. Click this unit to change its value. At most three Tunnels including OSI and GRE can be enabled in each NE.

<MS DCC link status>: Specifies the current MS DCC link status.

<RS DCC Mode>: Specifies the current RS DCC mode. Click this unit to change its value to either <Enabled> or <Disabled>.

<RS DCC Protocol>: Specifies the current RS DCC protocol, including <HDLC>, <OSI>, <PPP> or <GRE Tunnel>. Click this unit to change its value. At most three Tunnels including OSI and GRE can be enabled in each NE.

<RS DCC link status>: Specifies the current RS DCC link status.

Click <Query> to view the latest information.

Click <Apply> to make the modification in use.

Click <OK> to make the modification in use and close the window.



182 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Click <Print> to print all information in this window.


15.4 OSI Configuration In the chassis view select one SDH port. From the main menu, select <DCN>→<OSI Configuration>. The <OSI Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.4)

Fig. 15.4 OSI Configuration

Select <User> or <Network> in the <Network Side> drop-down menu based on the current NE’s position.

<Card>: The card type and slot number of the SDH or 4xSTM-1E card.

<Port>: The port number.

<DCC Mode>: <MS> or <RS>.

<Status>: <Active> or <Deactive>.

Input the corresponding values in other fields. The meanings of those parameters are listed below.

<LAPD T200 (ms)>: Response monitoring timer (measured in milliseconds). The default value is 1s, the settable range is from 2ms to 2.5s.

<LAPD T203(s)>: Timer that monitors time at which no frame is transferred (measured in seconds). The default value is 10s, the settable range is fixed.

<LAPD N200>: Maximum number of frames retransmitted. The default value is 3 times, the settable range is fixed.

<LAPD Window>: Maximum number of outstanding I frames.The default value is 7; the settable range is from 1 to 127.

<ESIS Config Timer(s)>: The timer interval (measured in seconds). The default value is 10 seconds.

<CLNS TTL>: The time to live for a CLNP PDU. The value is 255.

<Local NSAP>: The local NSAP address.

<Remote NSAP>: The destination NSAP address.

<Destination IP>: The destination IP address

<MTU>: The maximum length of the frame. The range is from 1300 bytes to 1500 bytes, the default value is 1500.

Click <Refresh> to check the real-time OSI properties.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 183



Choose one SDH port in the table, and click <Edit> to edit the OSI properities of the selected port. (See Fig. 15.5)

Fig. 15.5 OSI Configuration


Click <Cancel> to close the window without saving the modifications.

15.5 GRE Tunnel In the chassis view select one SDH port. From the main menu, select <DCN>→<GRE Tunnel>. The <GRE Tunnel> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.6)

Fig. 15.6 GRE Tunnel


184 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Select <User> or <Network> in the <Network Side> drop-down menu based on the current NE’s position.

Select <False> or <True> in the <Bypass> drop-down menu

Input the corresponding values in other fields. The meanings of other parameters are listed below.

<Card>: The card type and slot number of the SDH or 4xSTM-1E card.

<Port>: The port number.

<DCC Mode>: <MS> or <RS>.

<Status>: <Active> or <Deactive>.

<LAPD T200 (ms)>: The retransmission timer (measured in milliseconds).

<LAPD T203 (s)>: The maximum time allowed without frames being exchanged (measured in seconds).

<LAPD N200>: The maximum number of frame repetitions.

<Destination IP>: The destination IP address.

<LAPD Window>: The window size in AITS mode. Possible values are 1 – 127.

Click <Refresh> to check the real-time GRE tunnel properties.



Choose one SDH port in the table, and click <Edit> to edit the GRE tunnel properities of the selected port. (See Fig. 15.7)

Fig. 15.7 Edit GRE Tunnel

Note: If Bypass mode is selected, the DCC mode of the current port and destination port must be of the same type. (Both are MS mode or RS mode).HDLC, PPP and OSI are available under this mode.


ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 185


15.6 MGMT Port RIP Configuration

In the chassis view, select <DCN>→<MGMT Port RIP Configuration> from the main menu. The <MGMT Port RIP Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.8)

Fig. 15.8 MGMT Port RIP Configuration

Select <Enabled> or <Disabled>, and click <Apply> to apply the modifications.

Click <Query> to check the current setting.

Click <Close> to quit the window without saving.


Note: If OSPF interface is enabled, MGMT port could not enable RIP mode.

15.7 IP Route Configuration

15.7.1 IP Interface Select <DCN> <IP Route Configuration> <IP Interface> from the main menu, and the <IP Interface> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.9)

The IP Interface parameters about the NE will be list in the <IP Interface> table. These parameters are listed below.

ii


186 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 15.9 IP Interface

All parameters and their meaning are list as below:

<Interface Index>: A unique number (greater than zero) that identifies each interface for TNMS-MP identification of that interface.

<Description>: a brief description of the IP Interface

<Type>: the type of the IP Interface

<MTU>: the maximum length of the frame

<Speed>: the speed of the IP Interface

<Physical Address>: the physical address of the IP Interface

<Administrative Status>: the IP interface’s administrative status. The value formed on the interface, and the interface will be advertised as an internal route to some area.

<Operation Status>: the IP interface’s operation status.




15.7.2 IP Static Route Select <Configuration> <DCN Management> <IP Route Configuration> <IP Static Route> and the <IP Static Route> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.10)

The IP static routes parameters for the NE will be list in the <IP Static Routes> table. These parameters are explained below.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 187

Fig. 15.10 IP Static Route

All parameters and their meanings are listed as below:

<Destination>: the destination IP address

<Mask>: IP mask of the IP static routes

<Protocol>: the protocol of the IP static routes


<NextHop>: the NextHop of the IP static routes

<Admin Status>: the administrative status of the IP static routes. The value formed on the interface, and the interface will be advertised as an internal route to some area.

<Operation Status>: the operation status of the IP static routes.

<Metric Type>: the metric type of the IP static routes.

<Cost>: the cost of the IP static routes.

Select one item in the list and click <Delete> to delete the selected IP static route.




Choose an IP static route in the table, and click <Edit> to edit the selected IP static route. (See Fig. 15.11)


188 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 15.11 Edit IP Static Route



Click <Add> in the <IP Static Route> window to add a new IP static route.

Fig. 15.12 Add IP Static Route



15.7.3 IP Routing Table Select <Configuration> <DCN Management> <IP Route Configuration> <IP Routing Table> and the <IP Routing Table> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.13)

The IP routing table parameters about the NE will be list in the <IP Routing Table>. These parameters are explained below.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 189

Fig. 15.13 IP Routing Table

All parameters and their meaning are list as below:

<Destination>: the destination IP routing table.

<Mask>: IP mask of the IP routing table

<Protocol>: the protocol of the IP routing table


<Next Hop>: the NextHop of the IP routing table

<Type>: the type of the IP routing table

<Age (s)>: the age of the link state advertisement in seconds.

<Metric>: the metrics of the IP routing table.




15.8 OSPF The OSPF submenu provides an entrance to manage and query parameters about OSPF. (See Fig. 15.14)

Note: Before configuring the parameters about OSPF, the “PPP”or “OSI” protocol for that DCC port must be selected firstly.

ii


190 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 15.14 OSPF Submenu

15.8.1 OSPF General Select <DCN> <OSPF> <OSPF General> from the main menu. The <OSPF General> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.15) In this window the user can find some basic OSPF information about the NE.

The OSPF general parameters about the NE will be list in the <OSPF General Info> field. All parameters are listed in the <OSPF General> field respectively.

Fig. 15.15 OSPF General

All parameters and their meaning are listed as below:

<Router ID>: A 32-bit integer uniquely identifying the router in the Autonomous System.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 191

<Administrative Status>: The administrative status of OSPF in the router. The value <enabled> denotes that the OSPF Process is active on at least one interface; <disabled> disables it on all interfaces.

<Version Number>: The version number of OSPF protocol.

<Area Border Router>: A flag to note whether this router is an area border router.

<AS Border Router>: A flag to note whether this router is configured as an Autonomous System border router.

<Extern LSA Count>: The number of external link-state advertisements in the linkstate database.

Click <Edit> to change <Router ID>, <Administrative Status> and <AS Border Router>. (See Fig. 15.16)

Fig. 15.16 Edit OSPF General

Click <Apply> to apply the modifications.

Click <Cancel> to cancel the operation.


Click <Close> to close the window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.


15.8.2 OSPF Area The OSPF Area contains information regarding to the various areas. The interfaces and virtual links are configured as part of these areas.

Select <DCN> <OSPF> <OSPF Areas> from the main menu, and the <OSPF Area> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.17)


192 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

The OSPF Areas parameters for the NE will be listed in the <OSPF Area> table. (See Fig. 15.17)

Fig. 15.17 OSPF Area


<Area ID>: A 32-bit integer uniquely identifying an area. Area ID 0.0.0.0 is used for the OSPF backbone

<Authentication Type>: The authentication type specified for an area. Additional authentication types may be assigned locally on a per Area basis.

<Import AS External>: The area's support for importing AS external link-state advertisements.

<Area Border Router Count>: the total number of area border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF Pass.

<AS Border Router Count>: the total number of Autonomous System border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF Pass.

<Area LSA Count>: the total number of link-state advertisements in this area’s link-state database, excluding AS External LSA's.

<Area Summary>: controls the import of summary LSAs into stub areas. It has no effect on other areas. If it is <noAreaSummary>, the router will neither originate nor propagate summary LSAs into the stub area. It will rely entirely on its default route. If it is <sendAreaSummary>, the router will both summarize and propagate summary LSAs.


Click <Delete> to delete the selected area.



Click <Add> to create a new OSPF area on this NE. Input <Area ID> and select value of <Authentication Type>, <Import AS External> and <Area Summary> in the drop-down menus. Other parameters’ value is set automatically. (See Fig. 15.18)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 193

Fig. 15.18 Add OSPF Area

Click <Apply> to add this OSPF area.

Click <Cancel> to give up adding this area.

In the <OSPF Area> window, click <Edit> to configure the OSPF areas on the NE provided that there are one or more OSPF Area records in current window. (See Fig. 15.19)


194 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 15.19 Edit OSPF Area

Click <Apply> to confirm the changes to this OSPF area.

Click <Cancel> to give up editing this area.

15.8.3 OSPF Interface The <OSPF Interface> window augments the ipAddrTable with OSPF specific information and describes the interfaces from the viewpoint of OSPF.

Select <DCN> <OSPF> <OSPF Interfaces> from the main menu, and the <OSPF Interface> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.20)

The OSPF Interface parameters for the NE will be listed in the <OSPF Interface> table.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 195

Fig. 15.20 OSPF Interface


<IP Address>: The IP address of this OSPF interface.

<Addressless Interface>: To ease the instancing of addressed and addressless interfaces; this variable takes the value 0 on interfaces with IP Addresses, and the corresponding value of ifIndex for interfaces having no IP Address.

<Name>: interface name for reference (slot/port)

<Area ID>: A 32-bit integer uniquely identifying the area to which the interface connects. Area ID 0.0.0.0 is used for the OSPF backbone.

<Type>: The OSPF interface type. The available values are <Broadcase>, <Point To Point> and <Loopback>.

<Administrative Status>: The OSPF interface’s administrative status. The value formed on the interface, and the interface will be advertised as an internal route to some area. The value <disabled> denotes that the interface is external to the OSPF.

<Router Priority>: The priority of this interface. This is used in multi-access networks.

<Transit Delay (s)>: The estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over this interface.

<Retransmission Interval (s)>: The number of seconds between link-state advertisement retransmissions, for adjacencies belonging to this interface.

<Hello Interval (s)>: The length of time, in seconds, between the Hello packets that the router sends on the interface.

<Router Dead Interval>: The number of seconds that a router’s Hello packets have not been seen before its neighbors declare the router down.

<State>: The OSPF Interface State.

<Designated Router>: The IP Address of the Designated Router

<Backup Designated Router>: the IP Address of the Backup Designated Router.

<Status>: Displays the status of the entry. Setting it to <invalid> has the effect of rendering it inoperative.


196 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

<Authentication Key>: The Authentication Key

<Authentication Type>: The authentication type specified for an interface.


Click <Edit> to change the attributes. (See Fig. 15.21)

Fig. 15.21 Edit OSPF Interface

Click <Apply> to confirm the changes to OSPF interface.

Click <Cancel> to give up editing.



15.8.4 OSPF Interface Metric OSPF Interface Metric describes the metrics to be advertised for a specified interface on the various types of service.

Select <DCN> <OSPF> <OSPF IF Metric> from the main menu. The <OSPF Interface Metric> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.22)

The OSPF interface metric parameters for the NE will be listed in the <OSPF Interfaces> table.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 197

Fig. 15.22 OSPF Interface Metric


<IP Address>: The IP address of this OSPF interface.

<Addressless Interface>: For the purpose of easing the instancing of addressed and addressless interfaces; this variable takes the value 0 on interfaces with IP Addresses, and the value of ifIndex for interfaces having no IP Address.

<Type of Service>: The type of service metric is referenced.

<Value>: the metric of using this type of service on this interface. The default value of the TOS 0 Metric is 108.

In the <OSPF Interface Metrics> window:




15.8.5 OSPF Neighbor The OSPF Neighbor describes all neighbors local to the subject router.

Select <DCN> <OSPF> <OSPF Neighor> from the main menu, and the <OSPF Neighbor> window will pop up. (See Fig. 15.23)

The OSPF neighbor of the NE will be listed in the <OSPF Neighbor> table.


198 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 15.23 OSPF Neighbor


<IP Address>: The IP address this neighbor is using in its IP Source Address.

<AddressLess Interface>: On an interface having an IP Address, the value is zero. On addressless interfaces, the value is the corresponding value of the Index in the Internet Standard MIB.

<Router ID>: A 32-bit integer (represented as a type IP Address) uniquely identifying the neighboring router in the Autonomous System.

<Options>: A Bit Mask corresponding to the neighbor's options field. The available values are 0, 1, 2, and 3. Bit 0 indicates that the system will operate on Type of Service metrics other than TOS 0. Bit 1 indicates that the associated area accepts and operates on external information. Bit 2 indicates that the system is capable of routing IP Multicast datagrams; i.e., that it implements the Multicast Extensions to OSPF. Bit 3 indicates that the associated area is an NSSA.

Bit 3 indicates that the associated area is an NSSA.

<Priority>: The priority of this neighbor in the designated router election algorithm. The value 0 signifies that the neighbor is not eligible to become the designated router on this particular network.

<State>: The State of the relationship with this Neighbor.

<Events>: The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state or an error has occurred.

<Length of Retransmission Queue>: The current length of the retransmission queue.

<NBMA Neighbour Performance>: displays the status of the entry.

<Hello Suppressed>: Indicates whether Hellos are being suppressed to the neighbour.

Click <Refresh> to view the latest neighbor information.




A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 199

15.9 Route Redistribution To share the routing information between RIP and OSPF protocol, open the <Route Redistribution> window first.

Follow the steps below to open the window.

Select the DCN Route Redistribution from the main menu.

The <Route Redistribution> window will appear. (See Fig. 15.24)

Fig. 15.24 Route Redistribution

The user can select <Enabled> in the <RIP to OSPF> field to re-distribute RIP to OSPF, or select <Enabled> in the <OSFP to RIP> field to re-distribute OSFP to RIP.

Click <Refresh> to view the latest route re-distribution information.

Click <Apply> to apply the modification without closing the window.

Click <OK> to apply the modification and close this window.

Click <Close> to close this window without saving.



200 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

16 Maintenance

16.1 PRBSTest Management PRBS (pseudo-random binary sequence) is used to measure the bit-error performance of digital systems by directly comparing of a received pseudo-random test pattern with a locally generated test pattern identical to the transmitted test pattern.

From the main menu, select <Maintenance>→<PRBS Test Management> to launch the <PRBS Test Management> window. (See Fig. 16.1)

Fig. 16.1 PRBS Test Management

Note: For E1 card, PRBS will be sent towards the CC direction and the VC12 coming from CC will be checked if its payload is PRBS.

16.1.1 Query Current PRBS Status of Ports To view the current PRBS setting for the ports, select the corresponding <Card> and <PRBS Status> information in the drop-down menus. The ports satisfying those conditions will be listed in the table. Click <Refresh> to query latest data. (See Fig. 16.1)

<Pattern>: The test patterns complied with the definition in ITU-T Recommendation O.151. (See Tab. 16.1)

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 201

Bit rates

(kbit/s)

Recommendations corresponding to multiplex system

Recommendations corresponding to digital line

section/line system

Bit rate tolerance

Test Pattern

1544 G.733 G.911, G.951, G.955 ± 50 · 10–6 215 – 1, 220 – 1

2048 G.732 G.921, G.952, G.956 ± 50 · 10–6 215 – 1 34368 G.751 G.921, G.954, G.956 ± 20 · 10–6 223 – 1

44736 G.752 G.914, G.953, G.955 ± 20 · 10–6 215 – 1, 220 – 1

139264 G.751 G.921, G.954, G.956 ± 15 · 10–6 223 – 1

Tab. 16.1 PRBS Test Pattern

<Status>: Status shows whether PRBS test is successful or has failed.

<PRBS Mode>: <Normal> or <Invert>.

16.1.2 Set PRBS Testing Select the corresponding NE and card in the drop-down menu to specify which port to operate PRBS testing on. All ports of this card will be listed in the table.

For the desired port, either double click or highlight and click the Setting button to open the PRBS Test Configure window. (See Fig. 16.2)

Fig. 16.2 PRBS Setting

Change port in the <Port> drop-down menu and set PRBS test status with <PRBS Disabled> or <PRBS Enabled> in the <Status> field.

Click <Apply> to confirm setting.

Click <Refresh> to view latest status of this port.

16.2 Loop-back Test Management From the main menu, select <Maintenance>→<Loopback Test Management> to launch the <Loopback Test Mangement> window. (See Fig. 16.3)


202 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 16.3 Loopback Test

16.2.1 Querying Loopback Status To view the loopback status of a port, select the corresponding <NE>, <Card>, and <Loopback Type> desired in the drop-down menu. Click <Query> and all ports that satisfy the conditions will be listed in the table.

16.2.2 Setting Loopback Test Loopback maintenance is supported on any PDH/SDH port, ATM port (LAN/WAN), and transparent Ethernet LAN port. It is used to locate the malfunction point in the network when service is interrupted..

There are two loopback types: <In Loopback> and <Out Loopback>. Out Loopback is far-end loopback, while In Loopback is near-end loopback. When service is interrupted, if Out Loopback is pass-through, it means that the NE works well; there is something wrong with other NEs in the network.

Select the corresponding NE, card, and port in drop-down menu to specify which ports to operate loopback testing on. All ports that satisfy the conditions will be listed in the table.

For the desired port, either double click or highlight and click <Setting> to open the <Loopback Test Configure> window. (See Fig. 16.4)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 203

Fig. 16.4 Lookback Test Configure

Choose <Loopback Type>: <In LoopBack> or <Out LoopBack>.

<In LoopBack>: Rx signal will be looped back to the Tx port.

<Out LoopBack>: Tx signal will be looped back to the Rx port.

Click <Begin> to start testing. The <LoopBack Status> line will show the current status.

Click <Stop> to end the test.



16.3 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management From the main menu, select <Maintenance>→<AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management> to launch the <AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management> window. (See Fig. 16.5)


204 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 16.5 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management

Note: AIS means Alarm Indication Signal in Multiplex Sections, RDI means Remote Defect Indictor in Multiplex Sections.

Select <NE>, <Card>, <Port> and <Test Status>, and click <Query>.

All TPs satisfying those terms will appear. To set AIS/RDI conditions about one TP, select that item in the list, and click <Setting>, or double click the list item. The configuration window will pop up. There are three types of AIS/RDI Insertion Set based on the two types of TPs(such as AU4 and VC12). (See Fig. 16.6 and Fig. 16.7)

Fig. 16.6 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Set 1

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 205



Click <OK> to confirm the setting and quit this dialog.

Note:

1. For E1 card,

VC12 <Out Forced-RDI>: RDI will be inserted towards CC direction.

TU12 <Out Forced-AIS>: TU-AIS will be inserted towards CC direction.

2. For SDH card,

<In Forced-AIS>: AIS will be inserted towards CC direction.

<Out Forced-RDI>: RDI will be inserted towards Tx port.

16.4 LED Test LED test is used to check if the LEDs of an NE are working correctly.

From the main menu, select <Maintenance>→<LED Test> to launch the <LED Test> window. (See Fig. 16.9)

Fig. 16.9 LED Test

ii


206 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Click <Test LED>. If the LEDs of this NE work correctly, the LEDs will flash for a few moments then go to their normal state.

Note: All the LEDs except Power LED on every card will blink for about 3 seconds when doing LED test.

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 207

17 Performance Monitoring Management

17.1 Overview of Performance Monitoring

17.1.1 SDH Performance Monitoring

17.1.1.1 PM in Regeneration Section (G.829) Definitions

Block: For STM-N (N=1, 4, 16), the N× BIP-8 contained in the B1 bytes pertains to N blocks. Thus, the signal structure of an RS in an STM-N comprises N blocks within a frame.

Errored Block (EB): A block in which one or more bits are in error.

Errored Second (ES): A one second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect.

Severely Errored Second (SES): A one-second period which contains >=X% errored blocks or at least one defect. SES is a subset of ES.

Constant Severely Errored Second (CSES): Period with consecutive SES.

Background Block Error (BBE): An errored block not occurring as part of an SES.

Unavailable Second (UAS): Ten consecutive SES seconds will cause the UAS to increase. Ten consecutive error free seconds will stop the UAS from increasing.

Out of Frame Second (OFS): A one-second period with one or more wrong frames.

UnAvailable Period (UAP): Timestamps indicating the beginning and end of an Unavailable Period. A period of unavailable time begins at the onset of ten consecutive SES events. These ten seconds are considered to be part of unavailable time. A new period of available time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive non-SES events. UAP is independent from 15m or 24h UAS. Even if the UAS was manually reset, UAP should retain its value.

Note: There is no mechanism for collecting far-end performance data for the RS layer.

Anomalies An error on the whole block is indicated by the EDC (Error Detection Code).

Defects LOS: Loss of signal

LOF: Loss of frame

RS TIM: Trace identify mismatch in SDH Regeneration Section

Estimation of the performance events ES: one anomaly or one defect in a second

SES:≥’Y’ EBs with one anomaly or one defect a second, Y = blocks per second *xx%

BBE: anomalies but not in SES

ii


208 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Rate STM-0 STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 EBs 800 2,400 2,400 2,400 xx% (EBs) 10% 30% 30% 30%

Tab. 17.1 Regenerator Section SES threshold xx% (for BIP-8)

17.1.1.2 PM in Multiplex Section (G.829) Definitions MS: The N×24 BIP-1s contained in the B2 bytes of an SDH MS in an STM-N (N=1, 4, 16) pertains to N×24 in different blocks. Thus, the signal structure of a generic MS comprises N×24 blocks within a frame.

MS Far End Errored Blocks: Number of error blocks indicated by REI in the STM-N frame.

For Errored Block (EB), Errored Second (ES), Severely Errored Second (SES), Constant Severely Errored Second (CSES), Background block error (BBE), Unavailable second (UAS), UnAvailable Period (UAP) - refer to the definition for RS. (ITU-T G.829)

Note: For STM-16, MS Far End Errored Blocks Size is defined as follow: STM-N Block Size

(bits) Blocks per frame

Blocks per seconds

EDC

STM-16 801 384 3,072,000 384xBIP-1 (but maximum 255xBIP-1 can be detected and reported)

Tab. 17.2 MS Far End Errored Blocks Size- STM-16

Anomalies An Errored Block happens as indicated by an EDC.

Defects Near end defects of Trail termination Applicable Path

MS AIS Multiplex Sections

Tab. 17.3 Defects Resulting in a Near-end Severely Errored Second

Near end defects of Path termination Applicable Path

MS RDI Multiplex Sections

Tab. 17.4 Defects resulting in a Far-end Severely Errored Second

Note: MS AIS means Alarm Indication Signal in Multiplex Sections. MS RDI means Remote Defect Indictor in Multiplex Sections.

Estimation of the performance events ES: one anomaly or one defect in a second.

SES: ≥’Y’ EBs with one anomaly or one defect a second, Y= (number of blocks per second × xx%).

BBE: anomalies but not in SES.

ii

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 209

Rate STM-0 STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 EBs 9,600 28,800 192,000 921,600 Xx% (EBs) 15% 15% 25% 30%

Tab. 17.5 Multiplex Section SES threshold xx% (For BIP-1)

17.1.1.3 PM for HP/LP (High Order and Low Order Paths) (G.829) Definitions HP: The BIP-8 contained in the B3 byte of an SDH HP pertains to one block. Thus, the signal structure of a generic HP comprises 1 block within a frame. LP VC3s are the same.

HP Far End: The count contained in the G1 byte of an SDH HP pertains to one block. Thus, the signal structure of a generic HP (far end) comprises 1 block within a frame. LP VC3s are the same.

LP: The BIP-2 contained in the V5 byte of an SDH LP pertains to one block. Therefore, the signal structure of a generic LP comprises 1 block within a multi-frame.

LP Far End: The FEBE bit contained in the V5 byte of an SDH LP pertains to one block. Therefore, the signal structure of a generic LP (far end) comprises 1 block within a multi-frame.

For Errored block (EB), Errored Second (ES), Severely Errored Second (SES), Constant Severely Errored Second (CSES), Background block error (BBE), Unavailable second (UAS), UnAvailable Period (UAP) - refer to the definition for RS. (ITU-T G.829)

Anomalies An EB happens as indicated by an EDC.

Defects Near end defects of Trail termination Applicable Path

LP UNEQ (Note 2) LP TIM TU LOP TU AIS TU LOM LP PLM

Lower Order Path

HP UNEQ (Note 2) HP TIM AU LOP AU AIS HP PLM

Higher Order Path

Tab. 17.6 Defects Resulting in a Near-end Severely Errored Second

Note 1: This defect is not related to VC-3.

Note 2: Paths not actually completed, e.g. during path set-up, will contain the unequipped VC-n signal.

Near end defects of Path termination Applicable Path

LP RDI Lower Order Path HP RDI Higher Order Path

Tab. 17.7 Defects Resulting in a Far-end Severely Errored Second

ii


210 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Definitions and notes: LP UNEQ: Lower order Path is UNEQuipped.

LP TIML: Trace identifies mismatch in Lower order Path.

TU LOP: Tributary Unit Loss Of Pointer.

TU AIS: Tributary Unit Alarm Indictor Signal.

LP TIM: Lower order Trace Identify Mismatch.

LP PLM: Lower order Path PayLoad Mismatch.

HP PLM: Higher order Path PayLoad Mismatch.

HP UNEQ: Higher order Path UNEQuipped.

HP TIM: Higher order Path Trace Identify Mismatch.

AU LOP: Administrative Unit Loss Of Pointer.

AU AIS: Administrative Unit Alarm Indicator Signal.

LP RDI: Lower order Path Remote Defect Indiaction.

HP RDI: Higher order Path Remote Defect Indiaction.

Estimation of the performance events ES: one anomaly or one defect.

SES: ≥’Y’ EBs with one anomaly or one defect in a second, Y=blocks per second × xx%.

Rate VC-11/12/2 VC-3 VC-4/4c/16c

EBs 600 2,400 2,400 xx% (EBs) 30% 30% 30%

Tab. 17.8 Path Overhead Section SES Threshold xx% (For BIP-2, BIP-8)

17.1.1.4 PM for Pointer Justification Counts at Administrative Unit (G.707)

The AU pointer is contained in the H1, H2 and H3 bytes which are associated with, but not part of, the SDH Multiplexing Section Overhead. The N bits (bits 1-4) of the pointer carry the New Data Flag which allows an arbitrary change of the pointer value if that change is due to a change in the payload. The last ten bits (bits 7-16) of the H1 and H2 bytes carry the pointer value that designates the location of the byte where the VC-n begins. The H3 is the pointer action byte. The AU pointer provides a method of allowing flexible and dynamic alignment of the VC within the AU frame.

During normal operation, the NDF is disabled and set to "0110", and the pointer locates the start of the VC-n within the AU-n frame. If there is a frequency offset between the frame rate of the AUG and that of the VC-n, the pointer value will be incremented or decremented by one as needed, accompanied by a corresponding positive or negative justification byte or bytes. This operation is indicated by inverting five I-bits or D-bits of the pointer. The positive justification bytes appear immediately after the last H3 byte in the AU-n frame and the negative justification bytes appear in the H3 bytes in the AU-n frame.

If there is a change in the payload, NDF is enabled by inversion of the N-bits to "1001". The new location of the VC-n begins at the first occurrence of the offset indicated by the new pointer. For AU-4 concatenation, the AU-n pointer is set to Concatenation Indication, "1001" in bits 1-4 and ten "1"s in bits 7-16.

Currently PPJC and NPJC can be monitored only at AU-4.

Definitions:

PPJC - Positive Pointer Justification Count.

NPJC - Negative Pointer Justification Count.

Defects:


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 211

LOP - Loss of Pointer.

17.1.2 Data Performance Monitoring The following parameters can be monitored in the LCT:

Received Total Bytes

Received Total Frames

Received Total Good Frames

Received Total Bad Frames

Received Unicast Frames

Received Multicast Frames

Received Broadcast Frames

Received Dropped Good Frames

Received Undersized Good Frames

Received Oversized Good Frames

Received 64 Byte Frames

Received 65-127 Byte Frames





Received Pause Frames

Received Fragment Frames

Sent Total Bytes

Sent Total Frames

Sent Unicast Frames

Sent Multicast Frames

Sent Broadcast Frames

Sent Good Pause Packets

17.1.3 RPR Performance Monitoring The following parameters can be monitored:

Received Data Frames

Received Control Frames

Received Fairness Frames

Transmitted All Frames

Transmitted Add Frames

Transmitted Topology Frames

Transmitted Fairness Frames

Transmitted OAM and ATD Frames

Received HEC Error Frames

Received Parity Error Frames

Received FCS Error Frames

Received Edge Error Frames

Received Local Source Address Error Frames

Received Unicast Class A Frames


212 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Received Unicast Class A Bytes

Received Unicast Class B Eir Frames

Received Unicast Class B Cir Bytes

Received Unicast Class C Frames

Received Unicast Class C Bytes

Received Multicast Class A Frames

Received Multicast Class A Bytes

Received Multicast Class B Cir Frames

Received Multicast Class B Cir Bytes

Received Multicast Class B Eir Frames

Received Multicast Class B Eir Bytes

Received Multicast Class C Frames

Received Multicast Class C Bytes

Transmitted Unicast Class A Frames

Transmitted Unicast Class A Bytes

Transmitted Unicast Class B Cir Frames

Transmitted Unicast Class B Cir Bytes

Transmitted Unicast Class B Eir Frames

Transmitted Unicast Class B Eir Bytes

Transmitted Unicast Class C Frames

Transmitted Unicast Class C Bytes

Transmitted Multicast Class A Frames

Transmitted Multicast Class A Bytes

Transmitted Multicast Class B Cir Frames

Transmitted Multicast Class B Cir Bytes

Transmitted Multicast Class B Eir Frames

Transmitted Multicast Class B Eir Bytes

Transmitted Multicast Class C Frames

Transmitted Multicast Class C Bytes

17.2 SDH Performance Monitoring From the main menu, select <Performance>→<Current SDH Performance> to open the <Current SDH Performance> window. (See Fig. 17.1)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 213

Fig. 17.1 SDH Current Performance

The window provides the following parameters: No, Card, Port, TP, Granularity, Location, Start Time, Elapsed Time, Monitor, Auto-Report, ES, ES Alarm Threshold , BBE, BBE Alarm Threshold, SES, SES Alarm Threshold, UAS, UAS Alarm Threshold, CSES, OFS, PJCP, PJCP Alarm Threshold, PJCN, PJCN Alarm Threshold.

TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT provides the following primary PM management functions (see Tab. 17.9):

Functions Description

Unmonitor / Monitor / Monitor&Auto Report Dropdown

Configure the performance monitoring and the reports type.

Set All Apply the modification from the dropdown to all records Refresh Refresh the information. Filter Used to filter and display the points to be examined. This

function is only for the display selection since there are too many points to be displayed clearly. Note: Point is defined as a specific TP, an example a point could be defined as Node 182.16.1.1, Line Card 1, Port 3, or MS-TTP.

Edit PM parameters for each TP can be edited. Note: If a point is only edited and not filtered, this point will not be displayed. For proper operation, be sure the edited point is filtered first.

Reset All Reset all parameters for every TP in the table Print Print or save the PM values.

Close Close the window.

Help Launch the online help.

Tab. 17.9 PM Management Functions


214 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Note: If selecting <Unmonitor>, <Monitor>, or <Monitor&Auto Report> from the drop-down menu, and click <Set All> button, the modification will be applied to all the records.

17.2.1 Filter Setting In the <SDH Current Performance> window, click <Filter> to open the <Monitor Point Filter> window to filter TPs. (See Fig. 17.2)

Fig. 17.2 Monitor Point Filter

The filter is used to select TPs that will appear in the <SDH Current Performance> window.

<Granularity>: The performance monitoring granularity. It may be <15 Minutes> or <24 Hours>.

<Location>: The PM location. It may be <Near End> or <Far End>.

Select an existing terminal point, and click <Remove> to remove the selected TPs.

Click <Add> in the <Selected TPs> panel to add a new TP. (See Fig. 17.3)

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 215

Fig. 17.3 Select Terminal Point

Select the point to be monitored by choosing the corresponding <NE>, <Card>, <Port>, and <TP Type>. This is used to narrow the scope of TPs when searching for specified TPs. In the <TP type> drop-down menu, the value range is: RS, MS, VC4, VC4 (NIM), VC-4c (NIM), VC12 (NIM) and LOVC3.The desired points will be shown in the table below.

Select the desired TPs and click <OK> to add them to the <Selected TPs> frame of the <Monitor Point Filter> window.

Click <Cancel> to withdraw selections and close this window.

17.2.2 Edit Monitored Parameter Select <Performance> <Current SDH Performance>. Then the <SDH Current Performance> window will be shown. Choose one item in the list, and click <Edit>.

The <Edit Properties of Performance Monitoring> window is used to edit the performance parameters of TPs (See Fig. 17.4).


216 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 17.4 Edit Properties of Monitored Parameter

This screen is divided into four parts: <Selected TPs>, <Granularity>, <Location>, and <Monitor Type>.

The <Selected TPs> section functions the same as that in the <Monitor Point Filter> window.

The <Granularity> section indicates the performance monitoring granularity.

The <Location> section indicates the PM location.

The <Monitor Type> section allows configuration of the performance monitoring and the reports to be provided. There are three options to choose among: <UnMonitor>, <Monitor>, and <Monitor & Auto Report>.

Note 1: If the user does not know the actual TP’s monitor status, <Monitor&Auto Report> should be selected.

Note 2: When the TP’s monitor status is set to <UnMonitor>, the alarm thresholding cannot be set.

17.2.3 Edit Threshold In <Current SDH Performance> window, select one or more PM, in the right click menu, the operator can set their monitor type, reset them and edit threshold. (See Fig. 17.5)

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 217

Fig. 17.5 Current SDH Performance (right-click menu)

Click <Edit Threshold> in the right click menu, the <Threshold Setting> window will be shown. (See Fig. 17.6)

Fig. 17.6 Threshold Setting

The Alarm Threshold of ES, BBE, SES, UAS can be configure in the window. If the current value of the parameter crosses the value of the threshold, an alarm will be launched.

Note: If more than one PM is selected to edit their threshold, their TP types must be the same, otherwise a warning window will appear. (See Fig. 17.7)

Fig. 17.7 Warning window

ii


218 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

The value range and default value of 15-minute and 24-hour are list in the following two tables. (See Tab. 17.10 and Tab. 17.11)

TCA Default Value Allowed Range

RS ES 114 1-900 RS SES 10 1-900 RS BBE 9000 1-65535 MS ES 114 1-900 MS SES 10 1-900 MS BBE 36000 1-65535 MS ES (Far End) 114 1-900 MS SES (Far End) 10 1-900 MS BBE (Far End) 36000 1-65535 VC4-TTP ES 180 1-900 VC4-TTP SES 15 1-900 VC4-TTP BBE 36000 1-65535 VC4-TTP ES (Far End) 180 1-900 VC4-TTP SES (Far End) 15 1-900 VC4-TTP BBE (Far End) 36000 1-65535 VC4-TTP UAS (Far End) 15 1-900 AU4 PJCP 3600 1-65535 AU4 PJCN 3600 1-65535

Tab. 17.10 Default Value and Value Range for a Fixed 15-minute Period

TCA Default Value Allowed Range

RS ES 10,944 1-65535 RS SES 960 1-65535 RS BBE 48000 1-65535 MS ES 10,944 1-65535 MS SES 960 1-65535 MS BBE 48000 1-65535 MS ES (Far End) 10,944 1-65535 MS SES (Far End) 960 1-65535 MS BBE (Far End) 48000 1-65535 VC4-TTP ES 17,280 1-65535 VC4-TTP SES 1440 1-65535 VC4-TTP BBE 48000 1-65535 VC4-TTP ES (Far End) 17,280 1-65535 VC4-TTP SES (Far End) 1440 1-65535 VC4-TTP BBE (Far End) 48000 1-65535

VC4-TTP UAS (Far End) 20 1-65535

AU4 PJCP 35000 1-65535

AU4 PJCN 35000 1-65535

Tab. 17.11 Default value and Value Range for a Fixed 24-hour Period

17.2.4 History SDH Performance From the main menu, select <Performance>→<History SDH Performance>.

The <SDH History Performance> window is used to display the history value of one TP parameter. (See Fig. 17.8)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 219

Fig. 17.8 SDH History Performance

This window provides the following parameters: No, NE, Card, Port, TP, Granularity, Location, End Time, Suspect, ES, BBE, SES, UAS, CSES, OFS, PJCP, and PJCN.

The <Filter> function is the same as that of the <SDH Current Performance> window (refer to Chapter 17.2.1.)

The maximum records number of history performance in the LCT program is listed in the following table:

Parameter Granularity Maximum Records number

UAP 15-Minutes or 24-hours 6

Other parameters 15-Minutes 16

Other parameters 24-hours 1

Tab. 17.12 Maximum Records number of History Performance

For example, at most 6 history UAPs for each TP can be recorded in the LCT program. For other parameters, up to the last 8-hours for 15-Minutes performance and up to the previous 1-Day period for 24-hrs performance can be recorded in the LCT program.



Click <Print> to print the information of the selected SDH history performance.


17.2.5 SDH Unavailiable Periods From the main menu, select <Performance>→<SDH Unavailiable Periods> to open the <SDH UnAvailable Periods> window. (See Fig. 17.9)


220 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 17.9 SDH Unavailiable Periods

Click <Change> to change selected TP in the <Selected TPs> field and the <Select Terminal Point> window will appear. (See Fig. 17.10)


Filter to the desired TP using the dropdown menus, select terminal point from the table, and click <OK> to go back to the <SDH Unavailable Periods> window.

In the <Location> panel choose the selected TP to be monitored as either <Near End> or <Far End>.

The value can be displayed by Curve Graph.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 221

Click <Query> to check the latest PM information.

Click <Print> to print the PM report.

Click <Edit> to reset the monitoring setting. (See Fig. 17.11)

Fig. 17.11 Edit Setting


Click <Close> to quit this dialog. All unsavedmodifications will be lost.


The maximum records number for each type of PM is configurable and can be up to 1016-1, i.e. 999,999,999,999,999. This number is applicable, at the same time, to all seven history Performance database tables (SDH, Ethernet, RPR Span, RPR Mac Client, E1 Bit Slip, and SDH UAP); the default value of the number is 108-1, i.e. 99,999,999.

17.3 Ethernet Performance Monitoring Configuration In the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT, the following primary Ethernet PM functions are provided (see Tab. 17.13):


222 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Functions Description Unmonitor / Monitor / Monitor&Auto Report Dropdown

Configure the performance monitoring and the reports type.


function is only for the display selection since there are too many points to be displayed clearly. Note: Point is defined as a specific LAN or WAN port. For example a Point could be described as Node 182.16.1.1, UDC 1, and LAN port1.

Edit Ethernet PM parameters for each LAN or WAN port can be edited Note: If a point is only edited and not filtered, this point will not be displayed. For proper operation, be sure the edited point is filtered first.

Reset All Reset all parameters for every TP in the table Print Print or save the Ethernet PM values. Close Quit the window. Help Launch the online help.

Tab. 17.13 Primary Ethernet PM Function

Note: If selecting <Unmonitor>, <Monitor>, or <Monitor&Auto Report> from the drop-down menu, and click <Set All> button, the modification will be applied to all the records.

From the main menu, select <Performance> <Current Ethernet Performance> to open the <Ethernet Current Statistics> window. (See Fig. 17.12)

Fig. 17.12 Ethernet Current Statistics

The window is divided into two parts.

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 223

In the upper panel, the parameters can be chosen by selecting the corresponding checkbox. The following parameters can be chosen to be monitored: Received Total Bytes, Received Total Frames, Received Total Good Frames, Received Total Bad Frames, Received Unicast Frames, Received Multicast Frames, Received Broadcast Frames, Received Dropped Good Frames, Received Undersized Good Frames, Received Oversized Good Frames, Received 64 Byte Frames, Received 65-127 Byte Frames, Received 128-255 Byte Frames, Received 256-511 Byte Frames, Received 512-1023 Byte Frames, Received 1024-1518 Byte Frames, Received Pause Frames, Received Fragment Frames, Sent Total Bytes, Sent Total Frames, Sent Unicast Frames, Sent Multicast Frames, Sent Broadcast Frames, Sent Good Pause Packets.

In the other panel the following parameters of current Ethernet performance can be viewed in the table: No, Card, Port, Granularity, Start Time, Elapsed Time, Monitor, Auto-Report and the parameters selected above.

Choose a suitable filter parameter from this screen: the user’s choice of 24 kinds of Data PM Parameters. These 24 Data PM Parameters have been defined in Chapter 17.1.2.

Note: Different Ethernet cards have different frame size. Therefore, the moitored parameters may have differentia with the card’s type. The detail information about the frame size is listed in the table below: 6FE/L2 8FE/T 2GE/T 2xGE+8FE/AE

Received number of unicast frames

64~1536 64~1518 and less than 64

64~MAX 64~

Received number of multicast frames

64~1536 64~1518 and less than 64

64~MAX 64~

Received number of broadcast frames

64~1536 64~1518 and less than 64

64~MAX 64~

Received number of good bytes

The total size of UC, MC, and BC

NA The total size of UC, MC, and BC

NA

Received number of good packets

The total size of UC, MC, and BC

64~1518 The total size of UC, MC, and BC

64~1518

Received number of CRC erred frames

64~1536 and FCS Error

64~1518 and FCS Error

64~1536 and FCS Error 64~1518 and

FCS Error Received number of oversized frames

more than 1536 and FCS Valid


more than MAX and FCS Valid


Received number of undersized frames

less than 64 and FCS Valid




Tab. 17.14 Frame Size Ranges for Different Parameters

17.3.1 Filter Setting The <Monitor Point Filter> window is launched by clicking <Filter> in the <Ethernet Current Performance> window. (See Fig. 17.13)

ii


224 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619


This function is the same as the SDH Performance Filter function. Click <Add> to select the port. (See Fig. 17.14)

Fig. 17.14 Select Port

In the <Monitor Point Filter> window choose a suitable filter parameter from this screen to filter ports: <15 Minutes> or <24 Hours>.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 225

17.3.2 Editing Monitored Parameter The <Edit Properties of Performance Monitor> window can be launched by clicking <Edit> in <Ethernet Current Performance> window. (See Fig. 17.15)

Fig. 17.15 Edit Properties of Performance Monitor

There are three frames in this window: <Selected Ports>, <Granularity>, and <Monitor Type>.

The <Selected Ports> panel is used to choose the LAN or WAN ports which to be monitored.

The <Granularity> panel allows the choice of a suitable filter parameter: <15 Minutes> or <24 Hours>.

The <Monitor Type> panel gives the user port monitor state options. There are three options to choose among: <UnMonitor>, <Monitor>, and <Monitor&Auto Report>. If the user does not know the actual TP’s monitor status, all three monitor types should be selected.

17.3.3 5-Second Ethernet Performance From the main menu, select <Performance> <5 Second Ethernet Performance> to open the <Current 5-Second Ethernet Performance> window. (See Fig. 17.16)


226 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 17.16 Current 5 Second Ethernet Statistics

There are two panels in the window: <Ethernet 5s PM Enabled Ports> and <Ethernet 5s PM Data in Last 5 Minutes>.

The <Ethernet 5s PM Data in Last 5 Minutes> panel provides the following parameters: Card, Port, Index, Received Total Bytes, Received Total Frames, Received Total Good Frames, Received Total Bad Frames, Received Unicast Frames, Received Multicast Frames, Received Broadcast Frames, Received Dropped Good Frames, Received Undersized Good Frames, Received Oversized Good Frames, Received 64 Byte Frames, Received 65-127 Byte Frames, Received 128-255 Byte Frames, Received 256-511 Byte Frames, Received 512-1023 Byte Frames, Received 1024-1518 Byte Frames, Received Pause Frames, Received Fragment Frames, Sent Total Bytes, Sent Total Frames, Sent Unicast Frames, Sent Multicast Frames, Sent Broadcast Frames, Sent Good Pause Packets.

Click <Enable> in the <Ethernet 5s PM Enabled Ports> panel to select ports whose performance to be monitored. (See Fig. 17.17)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 227


In the <Port Filter> panel, select the card and port type in the <Card> and <Port> drop-down menus.

Available ports will be listed in the <Available Ports> table, select the ports to be monitored.

To remove ports from the <Ethernet 5s PM Enabled Ports> panel, highlight the ports to be removed, and click the <Disable> button.

Note: The maximum number of Ethernet 5s PM Enabled ports allow is 2.

Click the <Refresh> button, and the following parameters of Ethernet 5s performance can be viewed in the Ethernet 5s PM Data in Last 5 Minutes table: <Card>, <Port> and <Start Time>.



17.3.4 History Ethernet Performance From the main menu, select <Performance>→<History Ethernet Performance>. The <History Ethernet Statistics> window will appear. (See Fig. 17.18)

ii


228 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 17.18 History Ethernet Statistics

This window provides the following parameters: No, NE, Card, Port, Granularity, End Time, Suspect, Received Total Bytes, Received Total Frames, Received Total Good Frames, Received Total Bad Frames, Received Unicast Frames, Received Multicast Frames, Received Broadcast Frames, Received Dropped Good Frames, Received Undersized Good Frames, Received Oversized Good Frames, Received 64 Byte Frames, Received 65-127 Byte Frames, Received 128-255 Byte Frames, Received 256-511 Byte Frames, Received 512-1023 Byte Frames, Received 1024-1518 Byte Frames, Received Pause Frames, Received Fragment Frames, Sent Total Bytes, Sent Total Frames, Sent Unicast Frames, Sent Multicast Frames, Sent Broadcast Frames, Sent Good Pause Packets.

The <Filter> function is the same as that of the <Ethernet Current Performance> window. (Refer to Chapter 17.3)

The maximum records number of Ethernet history performance is the same as that of SDH history performance. (Refer to Chapter 17.2.3)

Click <Refresh> to see the most recent settings.


Click <Print> to print the Ethernet history information.


Note: For 15-minute granularity, the maximum history Ethernet performance records number is 16; while for 24-hour granularity, the number is 1.

17.4 Ethernet VLAN Performance Monitoring Configuration In the main menu bar, select <Performance>→<Current Ethernet VLAN Statistics> to open the <Current Ethernet VLAN Statistics> window. (See Fig. 17.19)

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 229

Fig. 17.19 Current Ethernet VLAN Statistics

The window provides the following parameters: No, NE, Card, Port, VLAN ID, Granularity, Start Time, Elapsed Time, Received Frames, Received Bytes, Dropped Frames.

17.4.1 Enable Setting The <Enable per VLAN Ethernet PM> window is launched by clicking <Enable> in the <Current Ethernet VLAN Statistics> window. (See Fig. 17.20)

Fig. 17.20 Enable per VLAN Ethernet PM

17.4.1.1 Port and VLAN Filter The filter is used to select Port and VLAN that will appear in the <Current Ethernet VLAN Statistics> window. Click <Add> in the <Selected Ports> panel to add a new Port. (See Fig. 17.21 )


230 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 17.21 Select Port and VLAN

Select the port to be monitored by choosing the corresponding items and click <OK> to add them to the <Selected Ports> frame of the <Enable per VLAN Ethernet PM> window.


In the <Monitor Point Filter> window, select existing ports and click <Remove> to remove the selected Ports.

17.4.2 History Ethernet VLAN Performance From the main menu, select <Performance>→<History Ethernet VLAN Statistic>. The <Ethernet VLAN Statistics> window will appear. (See Fig. 17.22)

Fig. 17.22 Ethernet VLAN Statistics

The window provides the following parameters: No, NE, Card, Port, VLAN ID, Granularity, Received Frames, Received Bytes, Dropped Frames, End Time, and Suspect.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 231

17.4.2.1 Filter Setting The <Monitor Point Filter> window is launched by clicking <Filter> in the <Ethernet VLAN Statistics> window. (See Fig. 17.23)


This function is the same as the SDH Performance Filter function. Click <Add> to select the port. (See Fig. 17.24 )

Fig. 17.24 Select Port and VLAN

Select the port to be monitored by choosing the corresponding items.Select the desired Ports and click <OK> to add them to the <Selected Ports> frame of the <Monitor Point Filter> window.



232 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

In the <Monitor Point Filter> window, select existing Ports and click <Remove> to remove the selected Ports.

17.4.3 5-Second Ethernet VLAN Performance From the main menu, select <Performance> <5 Second Ethernet VLAN Performance> to open the <5-Second Ethernet VLAN Performance> window. (See Fig. 17.25)

Fig. 17.25 5 Second Ethernet VLAN Performance

There are two panels in the window: <Ethernet VLAN 5s PM Enabled Ports> and <Ethernet VLAN 5s PM Data in Last 5 Minutes>.

The <Ethernet VLAN 5s PM Data in Last 5 Minutes> panel provides the following parameters: Card, Port, VLAN, Index, Received Frames, Received Bytes, Dropped Frames.

Click <Enable> to select Card, LAN/WAN, and port whose performance to be monitored. (See Fig. 17.26)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 233

Fig. 17.26 Select Card, LAN/WAN, and Port

In the <Port and VLAN Filter> panel, select the card, LAN/WAN and port number in the <Card>, <LAN/WAN>, and <Port> drop-down menus.

Available ports will be listed in the table.

Choose the ports to be enabled in the table, and then click <OK> to add them to the <Enabled Ports> panel.

To remove ports from the <Ethernet VLAN 5s PM Enabled Ports> panel, highlight the ports to be removed, and click the <Disable> button.

Click the <Refresh> button, and the following parameters of Ethernet VLAN 5s performance can be viewed in the Ethernet VLAN 5s PM Data in Last 5 Minutes table: <Card>, <Port>, <VLAN ID> and <Start Time>.



17.5 Current E1 Bit Slip Performance From the main menu, select <Performance>→<Current E1 Bit Slip Performance> to open the <Current E1 Bit-Slip Performance> window. (See Fig. 17.27)


234 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 17.27 Current E1 Bit-Slip Performance

The window provides the following parameters: Card, Port, Granularity, Start Time, Elapsed Time, Monitor, Auto-Report, Positive Bit-slip, Positive Bit-slip Alarm Threshold, Negative Bit-slip and Negative Bit-slip Alarm Threshold.

17.5.1 Filter Setting Click <Filter> to launch the <Monitor Point Filter> window. (See Fig. 17.28)


This filter function is the same as the SDH Performance filter function.

The <Selected Port(s)> section is used to choose the E1 ports which need to be monitored.

Click <Add> to filter ports and add them to the list. (See Fig. 17.29)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 235


After selecting the ports to be monitored, click <OK> to return to the <Monitor Point Filter> window, and select monitoring granularity in the <granularity> panel. Then click <Save> to save the settings.

17.5.2 Editing Monitored Parameter

In the <Current E1Bit-Slip Performance> window, select the corresponding port and click <Edit>. This will enter the <Edit Properties of Performance Monitor> window.


There are four sections in this window: <Selected Port(s)>, <Granularity>, <Monitor Type>, and <Threshold Setting>.


236 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

The function of the <Selected Port(s)> section is the same as that in the <Monitor Point Filter> window.


The <Threshold Setting> section allows the configuration of Alarm Threshold. Two thresholds categories are available: <Positive Bit-Slip Alarm Threshold> and <Negative Bit-Slip Alarm Threshold>.

The <Monitor Type> section allows configuration of the performance monitoring and the reports to be provided. There are three options to choose among: <UnMonitor>, <Monitor>, and <Monitor&Auto Report>. Only one option can be selected.

Note: If <Unmonitor> is selected, for the selected port(s), the value of <Monitor> and <Auto-Report> in the <Current E1 Bit Slip Performance> are both shown as false ; If <Monitor> is selected, the value of <Monitor> and <Auto-Report> are true and false respectively ; If <Monitor&Auto Report> is selected, the value of <Monitor> and <Auto-Report> are both false.

17.5.3 Edit Threshold In <Current E1 Bit Slip Performance> window, select one or more records, in the right click menu, the operator can set their monitor type, reset them and edit threshold. (See Fig. 17.31)

Fig. 17.31 Current E1 Bit Slip Performance(Right-click menu)

Click <Edit Threshold> in the right click menu, the <Threshold Setting> window will be shown.

(See Fig. 17.32)

Fig. 17.32 Threshold Setting

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 237

There are two kinds of thresholds that can be configured: <Positive Bit-Slip Alarm Threshold>, and <Negative Bit-Slip Alarm Threshold>. The user can disable or enable them. The default values are both 2.

17.5.4 History E1 Bit Slip Performance From the main menu, select <Performance>→<History E1 Bit Slip Performance>. The <History E1 Bit Slip Performance> window will be shown. (See Fig. 17.33)

Fig. 17.33 History E1 Bit Slip Performance

The window provides the following parameters: No, NE, Card, Port, Granularity, End Time, Suspect, Positive Bit-slip, and Negative Bit-slip.

The function of <Filter> is the same as that of the <Current E1 Bit Slip Performance> window. (Refer to Chapter 17.5.1.)

The maximum records number of E1 Bit Slip history performance is the same as that of SDH history performance. (Refer to Chapter 17.2.3)


Click <Print> to print the information of the selected Ethernet history performance.



17.6 PDH CRC Performance Monitoring From the main menu, select <Performance>→<Current PDH CRC Performance> to open the <Current PDH CRC Performance> window. This is the main window for the PDH CRC Current Performance. (See Fig. 17.34)


238 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 17.34 PDH CRC Current Performance

The window provides the following parameters: No, Card, Port, Port Type, Granularity, Location, Start Time, Elapsed Time, Monitor, Auto-Report, ES, ES Alarm Threshold , BBE, BBE Alarm Threshold, SES, SES Alarm Threshold, UAS, UAS Alarm Threshold, and CSES.

TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT provides the following primary PM management functions (See Tab. 17.15):

Functions Description Unmonitor / Monitor / Monitor & Auto Report Dropdown

Option for configuring the performance monitoring and the reports provided.


function is only for the display selection since there are too many points to be displayed clearly. Note: Point is defined as a specific TP, an example a point could be defined as Node 182.16.1.1, Line Card 1, Port 3, or MS-TTP.

Edit PM parameters for each TP can be edited. Note: If a point is only edited and not filtered, this point will not be displayed. For proper operation, be sure the edited point is filtered first.

Reset All Reset all parameters for every TP in the table Print Print or save the PM values.

Close Close the window.

Help Launch the online help.

Tab. 17.15 PM Management Functions

17.6.1 Filter Setting In the <Current PDH CRC Performance> window, click <Filter> to open the <Monitor Point Filter> window, which is used to filter Ports and set parameters. (See Fig. 17.35)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 239


17.6.1.1 Port Filter The filter is used to select ports that will appear in the <Current PDH CRC Performance> window. Click <Add> in the <Selected Ports> panel to add a new Port. (See Fig. 17.36)



240 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Select the point to be monitored by choosing the corresponding <NE> and <Card>.Select the desired Ports and click <OK> to add them to the <Selected Ports> frame of the <Monitor Point Filter> window.


In the <Monitor Point Filter> window, select existing Ports and click <Remove> to remove the selected Ports.

17.6.1.2 Parameter Filter

The parameter filter is used to decide the type of parameters that will appear in the <Current PDH CRC Performance> window. A parameter can be fully expressed by a few items: 15 minutes or 24 hours, Near End or Far End, and one or more of the following parameters: ES, BBE, SES, CSES, UAS.

If no parameters in the <Parameter> frame of the <Monitor Point Filter> window are selected, no results will be displayed in the main table of the <Current PDH CRC Performance> window.

17.6.2 Editing Monitored Parameter Select <Performance> <Current PDH CRC Performance>. Then click <Edit> in the <Current PDH CRC Performance> window.

The <Edit Properties of Performance Monitoring> window is used to edit port and PM parameters. (See Fig. 17.37)



A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 241

There are five sections in this window: <Selected Ports>, <Granularity>, <Location> <Threshold Setting> and <Monitor Type>.

The <Selected Ports> section functions the same as that in the <Monitor Point Filter> window.


The <Location> section indicates the PM location.

The <Threshold Setting> section allows the configuration of Alarm Threshold. Only ES, BBE, SES, UAS have this parameter. If the current value of the parameter crosses the value of the threshold, an alarm will be launched.

The <Monitor Type> section allows configuration of the performance monitoring and the reports to be provided. There are three options to choose among: <UnMontor>, <Monitor>, and <Monitor&Auto Report>.




17.6.3 Edit Threshold In <Current PDH CRC Performance> window, select one or more records, in the right click menu, the operator can set their monitor type, reset them and edit threshold. (See Fig. 17.38)

Fig. 17.38 Current PDH CRC Performance (Right-click menu)

Click <Edit Threshold> in the right click menu, the <Threshold Setting> window will be shown. (See Fig. 17.39)


242 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 17.39 Threshold Setting The Alarm Threshold of ES, BBE, SES, UAS can be configure in the window. If the current value of the parameter crosses the value of the threshold, an alarm will be launched.

17.6.4 History PDH CRC Performance From the main menu, select <Performance>→<History PDH CRC Performance>.

The <History PDH CRC Performance> window is used to display the history value of one Port parameter. (See Fig. 17.40)

Fig. 17.40 History PDH CRC Performance

This window provides the following parameters: No, NE, Card, Port, Port Type, Granularity, Location, End Time, Suspect, ES, BBE, SES, UAS, and CSES.

Click <Filter> to launch the <Monitor Point Filter> window. (See Fig. 17.41)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 243


This function is the same as the SDH Performance Filter function. The <Selected Ports> section is used to choose the ports which need to be monitored.

Click <Add> to filter ports and add them to the list. (See Fig. 17.42)



Click <Print> to print the information of the selected Ethernet history performance.




244 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

17.6.5 PDH CRC Unavailiable Periods From the main menu, select <Performance>→<PDH CRC Unavailiable Periods> to open the <PDH CRC UnAvailable Periods> window. (See Fig. 17.43)

Fig. 17.43 PDH CRC Unavailiable Periods

Click <Change> to change selected Ports in the <Selected Ports> field and the <Select Port> window will appear. (See Fig. 17.44)


Filter to the desired card using the dropdown menus, select Port from the table, and click <OK> to go back to the <PDH CRC Unavailable Periods> window.

In the <Location> panel choose the selected Ports to be monitored as either <Near End> or <Far End>.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 245

The value can be displayed by Curve Graph.

Click <Query> to check the latest PM information.

Click <Print> to print the PM report.

Click <Edit> to reset the monitoring setting. (See Fig. 17.45)

Fig. 17.45 Edit Setting




17.7 RPR Span Performance Monitoring Configuration In the main menu bar, select <Performancec>→<Current RPR Span Performance> to open the <Current RPR Span Performance> window. (See Fig. 17.46)


246 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 17.46 RPR Span Current PM


In the upper panel, the parameters can be chosen by selecting the checkbox in front. Click Select all parameters to choose all parameters.

The following parameters can be chosen to be monitored: Received Data Frames, Received Control Frames, Received Fairness Frames, Transmitted All Frames, Transmitted Add Frames, Transmitted Topology Frames, Transmitted Fairness Frames, Transmitted OAM and ATD Frames, Received HEC Error Frames, Received Parity Error Frames, Received FCS Error Frames, Received Edge Error Frames, Received Local Source Address Error Frames, Received Unicast Class A Frames, Received Unicast Class A Bytes, Received Unicast Class B Eir Frames, Received Unicast Class B Cir Bytes, Received Unicast Class C Frames, Received Unicast Class C Bytes, Received Multicast Class A Frames, Received Multicast Class A Bytes, Received Multicast Class B Cir Frames, Received Multicast Class B Cir Bytes, Received Multicast Class B Eir Frames, Received Multicast Class B Eir Bytes, Received Multicast Class C Frames, Received Multicast Class C Bytes, Transmitted Unicast Class A Frames, Transmitted Unicast Class A Bytes, Transmitted Unicast Class B Cir Frames, Transmitted Unicast Class B Cir Bytes, Transmitted Unicast Class B Eir Frames, Transmitted Unicast Class B Eir Bytes, Transmitted Unicast Class C Frames, Transmitted Unicast Class C Bytes, Transmitted Multicast Class A Frames, Transmitted Multicast Class A Bytes, Transmitted Multicast Class B Cir Frames, Transmitted Multicast Class B Cir Bytes, Transmitted Multicast Class B Eir Frames, Transmitted Multicast Class B Eir Bytes, Transmitted Multicast Class C Frames and Transmitted Multicast Class C Bytes.

In the other panel, the following parameters of current RPR span performance can be viewed in the table: No, Card, Span, Granularity, Start Time, Elapsed Time, Monitor, Auto-Report and the parameters selected above.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 247

17.7.1 Filter In the <Current RPR Span Performance> window, click <Filter> to open the <Monitor Point Filter> window, which is used to filter Spans and/or parameters. (See Fig. 17.47)


<Granularity>: Can be set to either <15 Minutes> or <24 Hours>. This is the time span for which the system will collect one set of statistics.

Click <Save> to save the setting.

Click <OK> to confirm the modifications and quit the window.

Click <Cancel> to quit this dialog. All unsavedmodifications will be lost.


In the <Selected Span(s)> frame click <Add> to open the <Select Span> window. (See Fig. 17.48)


248 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 17.48 Select Span

Select the spans to be monitored by choosing the corresponding NE and card name. The available ports will be listed in panel below. Select the spans you want to monitor and click <OK>. The selected spans will then appear in the <Monitor Point Filter> window.

To remove on of these spans, select it and click the <Remove> button.

Note: For different parameters, the corresponding frame size ranges are not same. The detail information is listed in the following table:

Received number of unicast frames UC Frame (64~)

Received number of multicast frames MC Frame (64~)

Received number of broadcast frames BC Frame (64~)

Received number of good packets Good frames >=64 good

Received number of CRC erred frames >=64 and FCS Error

Received number of oversize frames more than 1518 and FCS Valid

Received number of undersize frames less than 64 and FCS Valid

Tab. 17.16 Frame Size Range for Parameters

17.7.2 Edit Monitored Parameter Click <Edit> in <RPR Span Current Performance> window. The <Edit Properties of Performance Monitoring> window is used to edit the span and PM parameter. (See Fig. 17.49)

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 249

Fig. 17.49 Edit Properties of Monitored Parameter

It is divided into three parts: <Spans Selected>, <Granularity> and <Monitor Type>. Corresponding functions are the same as that in the <Monitor Point Filter> window.

Click <Apply> to confirm your modification.



17.7.3 RPR Span History Value To launch the <History RPR Span Performance> window:

In the main menu, select <Performance>→<History RPR Span Performance>.

The <RPR Span History Performance> window is used to display the history value of the monitored Span parameters. (See Fig. 17.50)

Fig. 17.50 RPR Span History Performance Value


250 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

The window provides the following parameters: No, NE, Card, Span, Granularity, End Time, Suspect, Received Data Frames, Received Control Frames, Received Fairness Frames, Transmitted All Frames, Transmitted Add Frames, Transmitted Topology Frames, Transmitted Fairness Frames, Transmitted OAM and ATD Frames, Received HEC Error Frames, Received Parity Error Frames, Received FCS Error Frames, Received Edge Error Frames, Received Local Source Address Error Frames, Received Unicast Class A Frames, Received Unicast Class A Bytes, Received Unicast Class B Eir Frames, Received Unicast Class B Eir Bytes, Received Unicast Class C Frames, Received Unicast Class C Bytes, Received Multicast Class A Frames, Received Multicast Class A Bytes, Received Multicast Class B Cir Frames, Received Multicast Class B Cir Bytes, Received Multicast Class B Eir Frames, Received Multicast Class B Eir Bytes, Received Multicast Class C Frames, Received Multicast Class C Bytes, Transmitted Unicast Class A Frames, Transmitted Unicast Class A Bytes, Transmitted Unicast Class B Cir Frames, Transmitted Unicast Class B Cir Bytes, Transmitted Unicast Class B Eir Frames, Transmitted Unicast Class B Eir Bytes, Transmitted Unicast Class C Frames, Transmitted Unicast Class C Bytes, Transmitted Multicast Class A Frames, Transmitted Multicast Class A Bytes, Transmitted Multicast Class B Cir Frames, Transmitted Multicast Class B Cir Bytes, Transmitted Multicast Class B Eir Frames, Transmitted Multicast Class B Eir Bytes, Transmitted Multicast Class C Frames and Transmitted Multicast Class C Bytes .

Click <Refresh> to see the most recent settings.

Click <Close> to close the window

Click <Print> to print the Performance report.


Click <Filter> to open the <Monitor Point Filter> window. (See Fig. 17.51)

Fig. 17.51 Select Parameter


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 251

In the <Granularity> frame choose between <15 Minutes> and <24 Hours>.

In the <Selected Spans> frame click <Add> to open the <Select Span> window. (See Fig. 17.52)

Fig. 17.52 Select SPAN

Select the spans to be monitored by choosing the corresponding NE and card name. The available ports will be listed in panel below. Select the spans you want to monitor and click <OK>. The selected spans will then appear in the <Monitor Point Filter> window.

To remove on of these spans, select it and click the <Remove> button.

17.8 RPR MAC Client Performance Monitoring Configuration In the main menu bar, select <Performance>→<Current RPR MAC Client Performance> to open the <Current RPR MAC Client Performance> window. (See Fig. 17.53)

Fig. 17.53 Current RPR MAC Client Performance



252 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

In the upper panel, the parameters can be chosen by selecting the checkbox in front. Click Select all parameters to choose all parameters.

The following parameters can be chosen to be monitored: Received Total Frames, Transmitted All Frames, Received Unicast Class A Frames, Received Unicast Class A Bytes, Received Unicast Class B Cir Frames, Received Unicast Class B Cir Bytes, Received Unicast Class C Frames, Received Unicast Class C Bytes, Received Multicast Class A Frames, Received Multicast Class A Bytes, Received Multicast Class B Cir Frames, Received Multicast Class B Cir Bytes, Received Multicast Class B Eir Frames, Received Multicast Class B Eir Bytes, Received Multicast Class C Frames, Received Multicast Class C Bytes, Transmitted Unicast Class A Frames, Transmitted Unicast Class A Bytes, Transmitted Unicast Class B Cir Frames, Transmitted Unicast Class B Cir Bytes, Transmitted Unicast Class B Eir Frames, Transmitted Unicast Class B Eir Bytes, Transmitted Unicast Class C Frames, Transmitted Unicast Class C Bytes, Transmitted Multicast Class A Frames, Transmitted Multicast Class A Bytes, Transmitted Multicast Class B Cir Frames, Transmitted Multicast Class B Cir Bytes, Transmitted Multicast Class B Eir Frames, Transmitted Multicast Class B Eir Bytes, Transmitted Multicast Class C Frames and Transmitted Multicast Class C Bytes.

In the other panel, the following parameters of current RPR MAC performance can be viewed in the table: No, Card, Granularity, Start Time, Elapsed Time, Monitor, Auto-Report and the parameters selected above.

17.8.1 Filter In the <Current RPR MAC Client Performance> window, click <Filter> to open the Monitor Point Filter window, which is used to filter Clients and set parameters. (See Fig. 17.54)



A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 253

<Granularity>: Choose either <15 Minutes> or <24 Hours>. The time span for which the system will collect one set of statistics.

If none of the checkboxes are selected in the <Parameters> panel, nothing will be displayed in the <Performance Monitored Point> window.

To add Clients to the <Selected Client(s)> panel in the <Monitored Point Filter> window click the <Add> button. The <Selected Client(s)> window will appear. (See Fig. 17.55)

Fig. 17.55 Select Client

Select any card to be monitored as client and click <OK>. The selection will be added to the <Selected Clients> panel of the <Monitor Point Filter> window.

Select one of these added clients in the <Selected Clients> panel and click <Remove> to remove it.

17.8.2 Edit Monitored Parameter Highlight a row and click <Edit> in <RPR MAC Client Current Performance> window. The <Edit Properties of Performance Monitoring> window is used to edit the highlighted span and PM parameter. (See Fig. 17.56)

Fig. 17.56 Edit Properties of Performance Monitoring

It is divided into three parts: <Selected Client(s)>, <Granularity> and <Monitor Type>. Corresponding functions are the same as that in the <Monitor Point Filter> window.

Click <Apply> to confirm your modification.




254 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

17.8.3 RPR MAC Client History Value To launch the RPR MAC Client History window:

In the main menu, select <Performance>→<History RPR MAC Client Performance>.

The <RPR MAC Client History Performance> is used to display the history value of one parameter for a Client. (See Fig. 17.57)

Fig. 17.57 RPR MAC Client History Performance Value

The following parameters are provided: No, NE, Card, Granularity, End Time, Suspect, Received Total Frames, Transmitted All Frames, Received Unicast Class A Frames, Received Unicast Class A Bytes, Received Unicast Class B Cir Frames, Received Unicast Class B Cir Bytes, Received Unicast Class C Frames, Received Unicast Class C Bytes, Received Multicast Class A Frames, Received Multicast Class A Bytes, Received Multicast Class B Cir Frames, Received Multicast Class B Cir Bytes, Received Multicast Class B Eir Frames, Received Multicast Class B Eir Bytes, Received Multicast Class C Frames, Received Multicast Class C Bytes, Transmitted Unicast Class A Frames, Transmitted Unicast Class A Bytes, Transmitted Unicast Class B Cir Frames, Transmitted Unicast Class B Cir Bytes, Transmitted Unicast Class B Eir Frames, Transmitted Unicast Class B Eir Bytes, Transmitted Unicast Class C Frames, Transmitted Unicast Class C Bytes, Transmitted Multicast Class A Frames, Transmitted Multicast Class A Bytes, Transmitted Multicast Class B Cir Frames, Transmitted Multicast Class B Cir Bytes, Transmitted Multicast Class B Eir Frames, Transmitted Multicast Class B Eir Bytes, Transmitted Multicast Class C Frames and Transmitted Multicast Class C Bytes.

Click <Refresh> to check the latest performance information.

Click <Print> to print the performance report.

Click <Close> to quit this window.


Click <Filter> to set up the Monitor Point Filter. (See Fig. 17.58)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 255

Fig. 17.58 Select Parameter

The function of the <Clients Selected> frame is to select a client for viewing. Click <Add> to add a new client. (See Fig. 17.59) Select an existing client and click <Remove> to remove it.

Fig. 17.59 Select Client

Select the NE and Card from the drop-down menus. You can select any card as client, which you want to monitor, and click <OK>.

In the Monitor Point Filter window, set the <Granularity> for RPR MAC Client.


Click <Cancel> to quit this window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.



256 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

18 Alarms and Event Management

18.1 Overview of Alarms There are five alarm severity level values defined:

• Critical—Service-interrupting alarms.

• Major—Service-affecting alarms.

• Minor—Non-Service-affecting alarms that could potentially become service-affecting. The user needs to inspect the system faults and provide fixes in order to prevent the alarm from deteriorating to Major.

• Warning—Non-Service-affecting alarms. Information is presented to the user for the purpose of maintenance.

• All—All the above four alarm severity levels.

There are five types of failures in the system:

• Transmission Failure—Failures related to transmission status, such as LOS, LOF, LOP, and LOM.

• Quality of Service Failure—Failure related to system performance, such as response time being too long, threshold crossing, and performance degradation.

• Equipment Failure—Failures related to hardware equipment.

• Processing Error Failure—Failures related to software or the fault processing, such as memory overflow, version incompatibility, software errors, program illegal interruption, NE configuration errors or an inaccessible NE, as well as AIS, TIM, REI, RDI, PLM, and UNEQ.

• Environmental Failure—Failures related to environment changes, such as unacceptable temperature and humidity, ventilation or cooling system faults, excessive vibration, or an open door in the equipment room.

18.2 NE Alarms

18.2.1 Current Alarms The <Current Alarms> tab displays all active alarms, and is updated when a new alarm occurs. This window displays the most current alarms. Alarms are listed in the order from the oldest to the newest with the oldest one listed at the bottom of the list. Each entry is highlighted with the color associated with its severity. This color coding allows the user to perform a quick visual inspection when all alarms are displayed.

When an alarm clears, the date and time when it was cleared is added to the list, and the color is changes to green. It is removed to active cleared alarm window.

Using TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT the user can:

• Change the alarm list to display different severities or multiple severities

• View the alarm occuring on different managed objects

• Sort the alarm list by field

• Clear the alarm list

• Refresh the alarm list

• View current alarm events from the chassis view


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 257

18.2.2 Viewing Active Alarms The alarm windows launched using different methods will show the alarms that are occuring on different managed objects.

To view the active alarms:

Choose an object (a card or a port), and select <Fault> <Active Alarms> from the main menu. (See Fig. 18.1) The alarm window will only show alarms that are occuring on the currently selected managed object. If neither a card nor a port is selected, the alarm window will show all alarms on the current NE.

Fig. 18.1 Open Active Alarms from Main Menu

Right-click an object (a card or a port), and select <Active Alarms> in the pop-up menu. (See Fig. 18.2) The alarm window will only show alarms occurring on the currently selected managed object.


258 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 18.2 Open Active Alarms from Right-click Menu To refresh only the alarms of interest, click on the appropriate icons on the <Alarm count by severity> section in the main window. (See Fig. 18.3) The alarm window launched here will show all alarms on current NE with the specific severity and category.

Fig. 18.3 Alarm Count by Severity

The <Active Alarms> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.4)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 259

Fig. 18.4 Active Alarms

18.2.3 Reviewing the Current Alarms The information contained in the Active Alarms tab is as follows:

Field or Button Description Severity The severity level of the alarm: Critical, Major, Minor, Warning,

or All. Category The related category of the specific alarm, including:

Process Error QoS Transmission Equipment Environment

Source The managed object that generates the reported alarm Alarm Message The name of the alarm Raised Time The time the alarm was raised (according to the clock on the

NE) Acknowledged By The user who acknowledged this alarm Acknowledged Time The time the alarm was acknowledged. (according to the clock

of the client) Cleared Time The time when the alarm was cleared. ClearStatus The status of the alarm. This includes:

Not cleared Cleared

Tab. 18.1 Active Alarms Information

Note: Active alarms are organized into pages. One page can display at most 2000 alarms. ii


260 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

18.2.4 Viewing Alarm Detail To know more information about one alarm, select this alarm and double-click it. Or select this alarm and click <Detail>. Then the <Alarm Detail> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.5)

The corresponding description about this alarm will appear in this window.

Fig. 18.5 Alarm Detail

18.2.5 Clearing Alarms To clear the alarm in the Current Alarms window, right-click the corresponding alarm, and select <Clear Alarm>. (See Fig. 18.6)

As a result, the alarm disappears from current alarm window and is recorded to the active cleared alarm window and the color becomes green. The clear status should be <Cleared Manually>.

Fig. 18.6 Clear Alarm

18.2.6 Alarm Search Click the <Search> button in the <Active Alarms> window or the <History Alarms> window, the <Alarm Search> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.7)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 261

Fig. 18.7 Alarm Search

<Severity> − Can be set as <All>, <Critical>, <Major>, <Minor>, or <Warning>.

<Category> − Can be set as <All>, <Communication>, <QoS>, <Equipment>, <Processing Error>, or <Environment>.

Click button, the <Alarm Source Config> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.12)

<Alarm Message> − Can be set as all kinds of alarm message needed.

<ClearStatus> − Can be set as <All>, <NotCleared>, <Cleared Manually>, <Cleared Synchronized>, or <Cleared>.

Click <OK> to confirm the modifications and the active alarms search result will appear in the <Active Alarm Search Result> window. (See Fig. 18.13)

Click <Cancel> to quit this window without saving any modifications.


18.2.7 History Alarms To view the history alarms:

Choose an object (a card or a port), and select <Fault>→<History Alarms> from the main menu. (See Fig. 18.8) The alarm window will only show alarms have occurred on currently selected managed object. If neither a card nor a port is selected, the alarm window would show all alarms on current NE.


262 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 18.8 Open History Alarms from Main Menu

Right-click an object (a card or a port), and select <History Alarms> in the pop-up menu. (See Fig. 18.9)The alarm window will only show alarms have occurred on currently selected managed object.

Fig. 18.9 Open History Alarms from Right-click Menu

The <History Alarms> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.10)

Fig. 18.10 History Alarms


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 263

To know more information about one history alarm, select this alarm and double-click it or highlight it and click <Detail>.

Note: Alarms are shown in several pages and one page can display at most 2000 alarms.

Click the <Search> button and the <Alarm Search> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.11)

Fig. 18.11 Alarm Search

<Severity> − This can be set as <All>, <Critical>, <Major>, <Minor>, or <Warning>.

<Category> − This can be set as <All>, <Communication>, <QoS>, <Equipment>, <Processing Error>, or <Environment>.

<Alarm Message> − This can be set as all kinds of alarm message needed.

<ClearStatus> − This can be set as <all>, <NotCleared>, <Cleared Manually>, <Cleared Synchronized>, or <Cleared>.

Click the Source>> button, the <Alarm Source Config> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.12)

ii


264 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 18.12 Alarm Source Config

Type in the NE Label, and select options from the <NE IP>, <Slot Number>, <Card Type>, <Port Number>, and <CTP Type> drop-down menus. Click <Apply> and <OK> to confirm the changes and close the window.

In the <Alarm Search> window:

Click <OK> to confirm the modifications and the active alarms search result will appear in the <Active Alarm Search Result> window.



Fig. 18.13 Active Alarm Search Result

18.3 LED Indicators A SURPASS hiT 7060 NE has four LED status indicators that show the operational status of the system.

• PWR (Power)

• CR (Critical Alarm)

• MJ (Major Alarm)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 265

• MIN (Minor Alarm)

These LEDs correspond to the LED status indicators displayed in the chassis view.

The following table describes four LED status indicators. LED name LED Color LED

Status Description

On 1. For Power cards, when a valid external power source is available, this LED will be on. 2. For other cards, Power is available on the card/system. It indicates present internal power supply.

Power Green

Off Power is not available due to a broken power converter or external power cable or connector.

On One or more critical non-communication alarms are present.

Flashing One or more critical or major alarms are present (for example, service affecting—LOS).

Critical Red

Off No critical alarms are present, and card/system is in service.

On There are one or more major alarms present.Flashing When any optional service card is mismatch

or faulty, Major alarm LED and Critical alarm LED will flash at the same time.

Major Orange

Off No Major alarms. On There are one or more minor alarms present

(non-service affecting). Minor Yellow

Off No Minor alarms. Note: Warning and indeterminate alarms do not turn on the LED.

Tab. 18.2 LED Status

18.4 Exporting Alarms

18.4.1 Exporting Active Alarms to a File To export the active alarm list:

On the menu bar, select <Fault> <Active Alarms>, and the <Active Alarms> window will display.

Click <Print>. The print setting window will appear. (See Fig. 18.14)

Fig. 18.14 Print Setting


266 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Select Paper type.

Select <Portrait> or <Landscape>.

Select Output file type.

Note: Do not select <System Printer> here.

Then click <OK>.

The <Print Preview> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.15)

Fig. 18.15 Report Alarms Preview

Click <Print>. The <Save File> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.16)

Fig. 18.16 Save File

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 267

Select the directory in which the alarms file will be saved, input the file name in the <File Name> field, and then click <Save>.

Alarms are now successively saved.

18.4.2 Printing Active Alarms To print the active alarms list:

Select <Fault>→<Active Alarms> from the main menu.

The <Active Alarms> window will display.

Click the button <Print>, then the <Print> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.17)

Fig. 18.17 Print Alarms

Select Page type.

Select Portrait or Landscape.

Select Output as <System Printer> and click <OK>.

The <print preview> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.18)

Fig. 18.18 Print Alarms Preview

Click <Print>. The print setup window will appear. (See Fig. 18.19)


268 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 18.19 Print Setup

Select and set up the printer if necessary, and then click <OK>.

Alarms are now successively printed.

18.5 Configuring Fault Management

18.5.1 Audio Alarm Configuration

To configure the Audio Alarm Configuration:

Select <System> <Alarm Audio Config> from the main menu. (See Fig. 18.20)

Fig. 18.20 Open Alarm Audio Configure from main menu

The <Audio Alarm Config> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.21)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 269

Fig. 18.21 Audio Alarm Configuration

Select whether Audio Alarm is enabled or disable.

Set the specific audio file to correspond with the varying alarms.

Choose the Edit the Alarm audio play times.

Click <OK> to confirm the configuration and close the window.

Click <Cancel> to close the window. All the unsaved modifications will be lost.

18.5.2 Alarm Type List Management By using Alarm Type List Management the user can view and configure alarms.

From the main menu, select <Fault> <Alarm Type List Management> to enter the <Alarm Type Management> window. (See Fig. 18.22 and Fig. 18.23)

Fig. 18.22 Open Alarm Type Management from Main Menu


270 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 18.23 Alarm Type List Management

Click <Refresh> to view current alarm type list. On the desired field, modify the <User Defined Severity> field by highlighting a row and right-clicking the corresponding field. (See Fig. 18.24)

Fig. 18.24 Modify User Defined Severity of Alarm

It will change the value in NE’s MIB if users modify the user defined severity.

Click <Refresh> to view the latest alarm type list.


Click <OK> to confirm the changes and close the window.


Click <Print> to print the result.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 271


18.6 Alarm Configuration for Single NE

18.6.1 AIS/RDI Alarm Configuration From the main menu, select <Fault>→<AIS/RDI Alarm Configuration>.

The <TP AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.25)

Fig. 18.25 TP AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration

When <Query> is clicked, two trees will be shown for AIS and RDI alarms respectively. Each tree has the same node structure as below:

NE Node

|___ Card Node

|___ Port Node

|___ TP Node

There is some logic while clicking the tree nodes. That is, after clicked any node on the tree, the tree will take a global check to make sure that the selection state of other nodes will be changed accordingly. (See Tab. 18.3)

Clicked Node Action Effect to Other Nodes

NE Node Change to the contrary selection state. If the ne node is half-selected before, it will change to be selected after clicking.

All of its offspring nodes (Card / Port / TP Nodes) will keep the same selection state with that of this node.

Card Node Change to the contrary selection state.

All of its offspring nodes (Port / TP Nodes) will keep the same


272 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Clicked Node Action Effect to Other Nodes If the card node is half-selected before, it will change to be selected after clicking.

selection state with that of this node.

Port Node Change to the contrary selection state. If the port node is half-selected before, it will change to be selected after clicking.

All of its offspring nodes (TP Nodes) will keep the same selection state with that of this node. Its parent card node will change the state accordingly.

TP Node Change to the contrary selection state.

Its parent card node and port node will change the state accordingly.

Tab. 18.3 AIS/RDI Alarm Tree Nodes Selection Logic

Click <Apply> to confirm the setting.

Click <OK> to confirm your change and quit the window.



18.6.2 Alarm Inhibit Configuration From the main menu, select <Fault>→<Alarm Inhibit Configuration>.

The <Alarm Inhibit Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.26)

Fig. 18.26 Alarm Inhibit Configuration – for port

Click to expand all the branches, or to collapse all the branches.

Check or uncheck the checkbox to the left of a port to enable or disable the Alarm Inhibit property of the port.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 273

Click <Refresh> to get the latest setting.

Click <Apply> to confirm the settings.

Click <OK> to confirm and finish all the modifications.

Click <Cancel> to quit this modification without any changes.


18.6.3 Alarm Persistent Time Configuration From the main menu, select <Fault> <Alarm Persistent Time Configuration>. The <Alarm Inhibit Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.27)

Fig. 18.27 Alarm Persistent Time Configuration

In the drop-down menu, select the persistent time values for both Alarm Detection Persistent Time and Alarm Cleaning Persistent Time. Both of them range from 1 to 20s, and have 2s and 10s as default value respectively.

Click <Refresh> to view the latest setting.


Click <OK> to confirm the changes and quit the window.



18.6.4 Alarm Out Configuration From the main menu, select <Configuration> <Alarm Out Configuration>.

The <Alarm Out Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.28)

Fig. 18.28 Alarm Out Configuration

Select <Alarm Out Suppress> to temporarily cutoff alarm out.

Select <Alarm Out Cutoff> to cutoff alarm out permanently.


274 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Select <Enable CR/MJ Alarm Out> to enable CR/MJ alarm out.

Select <Enable Minor Alarm Out> to enable minor alarm out.

Click <Refresh> to view the latest setting.





18.6.5 MDI/MDO Configuration From the main menu, select <Configuration> <MDI/MDO Configuration>.

The <MDI/MDO Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.29)

Fig. 18.29 MDI Configuration

MDI1-MDI3’s status can be set with <Disabled> or <Enabled> in this window.

Click the <MDO> tab to configure the MDO properties. (See Fig. 18.30


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 275

Fig. 18.30 MDO Configuration

In the drop-down menu, select MDO from <MDO> field and change its status.

In the field of <Already Associated Alarm List> or <UnAssociated Alarm List>, select

corresponding alarm and click button or button to change the associated property of this alarm.

Click <Refresh> to get the latest information about the MDI/MDO.





18.7 Displaying the Event Log To display the NE’s event log, select <Fault> <Events> from the main menu.

The <Events> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.31)


276 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 18.31 Node Event Log

Click <Print> to export all the events listed in the window to a file or print it. The detailed steps of exporting events are the same as those of alarms. (Refer to Chapter 18.4)

18.7.1 Interpreting the Event Log There are three types of events defined in the system: Management, Hardware, and Software. The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT time-stamps every event and logs the event to a log file. The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT displays the system events through Event/Alarm Manager. Events listed in the event log detail the time and date the event occurred, the name of the event, the type of event, and a short description of the event. The Event about the communication between NE and LCT is recorded by LCT itself rather than getting from NE.

Events are purely informational and indicate changes in the status of the system related to the management and administration of the system, such as a user logging onto the node or a change to configuration options.

18.7.2 Management Events The attributes of the management events should at least include: Event name, Timestamp, User name and privilege level, and Description.

Name Description User login Identifies the user that has just logged in. User logout Identifies the user that has just logged out. User auto-logout due to timeout Identifies the user that was just logged out by the

system because of inactivity. User password change The password of a user account has been changed.Unauthorized login attempt A user has attempted but failed to log in. Alarm log cleared A user has cleared out the alarm log file. Event log cleared A user has cleared out the event log file. System time changed according to the NTP server time

The system time is adjusted from yyyy:mm:dd, hh:mm:ss to yyyy:mm:dd, hh:mm:ss.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 277

Name Description System time changed by manual configuration

The system time is adjusted from yyyy:mm:dd, hh:mm:ss to yyyy:mm:dd, hh:mm:ss.

NTP function is changed Connect to NTP server failure When NTP function is enable, this event will be

reported as long as the communication is failure. Connect to NTP server successfully When NTP function is enable, this event will be

reported as long as the communication is success.

Tab. 18.4 Management Events

18.7.3 Hardware Events The object (located as precisely as possible) that generates the event should also be reported.

Name Description

Card booted The card has been booted. Card reset The card has been reset. Card disabled The card has been disabled. Card deleted The card has been deleted from the configuration. Card removed The card has been removed from its slot. Latch Switch Opened The latch switch (if any) of the card is opened. SFP changed The SFP module has been changed. (The SFP module is

allowed to be pulled out or plugged in.)

Tab. 18.5 Hardware Events

18.7.4 Software Events

Name Description Software Download started Software files are being downloaded to the backup storage

place through FTP. Software Download completed/failure

Software files are successfully downloaded to the backup storage place through FTP.

Software Upgrade started The software files in the backup storage place has started being activiated.

Software Upgrade completed/failure

A software upgrade has completed.

MIB Upload started The MIB files in the backup place are being uploaded to a server through FTP.

MIB Upload completed/failure

The MIB files in the backup place have been successfully uploaded through FTP.

MIB Download started The MIB files are being downloaded from a server to the MIB backup place through FTP.

MIB Download completed/failure

The MIB files have been successfully downloaded from a server to the MIB backup place through FTP.

MIB Backup started The active MIB files are being backup-ed. MIB Backup completed/failure

The active MIB files have been backup-ed.

MIB Restore started The MIB files in the backup place are being restored to active MIB files.

MIB Restore completed/failure

The MIB restoration has successfully completed.

MIB Clear started The MIB in selected NE is starting clearing


278 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

MIB Clear completed/failure The MIB clearing is completed/failure MIB file is failure MIB file detection will be done during the NE initial

procedure. If the checksum in a MIB file is wrong, this event will be reported after system start up.

Boot Image Upgrade completed

This event is reported when Boot Image is upgraded successfully during SW switching.

Boot Image Upgrade failure This event is reported when Boot Image is upgraded failure during SW switching.

Free space is not enough in CF card

This event is reported when the usage of CF card is more than 95%. (CF card can not be written any long)

Space is released in CF card

This event is reported when the usage of CF card is less than 90% (CF card can be written again)

Primary load copy from CF to SC succeeded

This event is reported when system is failed to load Software from boot flash

Primary load copy from CF to SC failed

This event is reported when system is failed to load Software from boot flash

System reset The system has been reset. System start The system is starting up. Timing configuration changed

One or more timing sources or references are changed.

Timing status changed One or more timing sources or references are changed.

Tab. 18.6 Software Events

18.7.5 Event Search Click <Search> in the <Events> window, the <Event Search> window will appear. (See Fig. 18.32)

Fig. 18.32 Event Search

To set the ID range, check the <ID (>=)> or <ID (<)> boxes and input ID range in the corresponding fields.

To set the raised time range, check the <Raised Time (After)> or <Raised Time (Before)> boxes and input or select the date from the drop-down menus.

When searching events using the <Event Description> field, the LCT can support a wildcard search by using *, such as using *aaa* to search events which contain the string “aaa”.

Click <OK> to confirm the modifications and the searchs result will appear in the <Event Search Result> window. (See Fig. 18.33)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 279



Fig. 18.33 Event Search Result

Note: Events are shown in several pages and one page can display at most 2000 alarms. ii


280 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

19 How To

19.1 Creating a TU-12 Cross-Connection between STM-16 and STM-1 1. Set TP Mapping To create a Cross Connection, first set the corresponding TP mapping according to the capacity of the Cross Connection to make sure that the slot mapping satisfies the cross connection requirements. The default slot mapping of SDH ports in SDH card is AU-4. Therefore, to create a TU-12 connection between those two cards, the user need refer to the following steps to change AU-4 mapping to TU12 mapping.

Step 1: Select <Configuration> <TP Multiplexing Structure> from the main menu, then a <TP Multiplexing Structure> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.1)

Fig. 19.1 TP Multiplexing Structure

Step 2: Select #1LC8<4×STM-4(1)> and the corresponding port, and then click <Query>. The querying result is shown in window. (See Fig. 19.2)

Fig. 19.2 Query Result

Step 3: Click the plus sign to expand the tree menu or click the minus sign to collapse the tree menu. Another option is to right-click the catalog name and then select <Expand> in the


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 281

pop-up menu to expand this function’s next catalog. Selecting <Expand All> also expands all the catalogs under this function. (See Fig. 19.3)

Fig. 19.3 Expanding Tree Graph

Step 4: If the slot is idle it is blue and if it is occupied it is orange. Notice that a slot mapping can be modified only when it’s idle.

Step5: Right-click an idle AU-4 slot, select <Mapping AU-4 (1)> <AU-4 To TUG-3> in the pop-up menu, then click <Apply>. The TP mapping between AU-4 and TU12 is complete.

Fig. 19.4 Mapping AU4 to TU12


282 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

The following picture is the modified TU12 slot.

Fig. 19.5 Result of Mapping

Note: If needed, the TU12 slot can be modified into AU-4, but all 63 TU12 slots must be idle. Right-click the AU-4 catalog to be modified, and select <Mapping AU-4(1)> <AU-4 Clear Channel>, and then click <Apply> to complete the configuration.

Fig. 19.6 Mapping TU12 to AU4

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 283

2. Create New Cross-Connection Step 1: Select <Configuration>→<Cross-Connect Management> from the main menu, and the <Cross-Connect Management> window will appear, or select the Cross-Connect board in the chassis view, right-click it, then select <Cross-Connect management> in the pop-up menu.

Fig. 19.7 Cross-Connect Management Menu

Fig. 19.8 Cross-Connect Management


284 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Step 2: Click <Create>, and the <Create Cross-Connect> window will appear.


Step 3: Select the property of the cross connection to be created in this drop-down menu:

<Capacity> is <VC-12>.

<Direction> is <Bi-Direction>. <Bi-direction> means configuration to both source and destination, which is the mainly application. <Uni-direction> means source and destination configuration respectively.

Source card is #LC7<1× STM-16(Line)>; source port is P01; destination card is #LC10<2×STM-1(Line)>; and destination port is P01.

Step4: Under the source port and destination port all available slots will be displayed (if the slot has been taken, or the slot mapping is different from the capacity of the cross connection, then it will not be shown).


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 285

Step 5: Select a slot in the source and destination respectively, and then click <Apply>, or click <OK> to apply the operations and close the window. The user can also select many slots to create many cross connections. This is done by holding the <Shift> key and then clicking to select many successive slots, or holding the <Ctrl> key and then clicking to select many independent slots.

Fig. 19.10 Create Cross-Connect window

19.2 Creating Timing Synchronized Network Fig. 19.11 shows a ring network composed of three TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 NEs. In this network, clock-in port on the NE-A SI is connected to a 2Mbit/s station clock with a precision of PRC. The other two NEs receive timing information from the STM-4 line signal connected to NE-A so they are synchronized with NE-A. An example of how to use the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT to manage these three NE’s timing will be illustrated.


286 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

2Mbit/s StationClock with a precision of PRC

NE - A

NE-B NE-C

Fig. 19.11 Three (3) Node Ring

When using the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT to manage the timing of NE-A, refer to the following steps:

Step 1: Select <Configuration>→<Synchronization Management> from the main menu. A <Synchronization Management> window will appear. Or select the cross-connection card, right click it, then select <Synchronization Management> in the pop-up menu.


Step 2: Click <Global Setting> in the <Synchronization Management> window, and the <Global Settings> window will appear.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 287


Step 3: Choose <Enabled> in the <QL Mode> drop-down menu. Choose <PRC (0×2)>, <SSU-A (0×4)>, <SSU-B (0×8)>, or SEC (0×0B)> from the <Expected_QL> drop-down menu. Click <Apply> and <Close>. Choose <Enabled> or <Disabled> in the <Frequence Offset Monitor Mode> drop-down menu.

Step 4: Click <Station Clock> in the <Synchronization Management> window. The <Station Clock Setting> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.14)

Fig. 19.14 Station Clock Setting

Step 5: Click <Signal Type> and set it to 2Mbit/s Framed. Click <Apply>, and then click <Close> to quit the window.

Step 6: The system sets the #T1<Timing Input>1 to reference the timing source in the default condition. If #T1<Timing Input>1 is not set to the reference timing source, select #T1<Timing Input>1, then right-click it and select <Add> in the pop-up menu to add it to the reference source. Next, double-click the #T1<Timing Input>1 reference as shown in Fig. 19.12. The <TimingSource Reference Properties Settings> window will appear as shown in Fig. 19.15.


288 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 19.15 Timing Source Reference Properties

Step 7: Click <Priority> and set it to 1; click <QL Provisioned Mode> and set it to <Provisioning>; click <QL (Quality Level)> and set it to <PRC (0×2)>. Click <Apply> and then click <Close> to quit the window.

Step 8: If there are other reference timing resources in timing resources information (See Fig. 19.16), select the reference timing source right-click, and click <Remove> in the pop-up window to remove the reference timing resource. Please remove all timing resources except #T1<Timing Input>1.

Fig. 19.16 Remove Timing Source Reference

Step 9: Click <System Clock> in Fig. 19.12. The <System Clock> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.17)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 289

Fig. 19.17 System Clock

Step 10: Select <AutoSelection> in <Operation Mode>, and click <Set Mode>. Auto Selection denotes that the clock has its frequency phase locked to an input reference signal. Click <Close> to quit the window.

Step 11: Timing management of NE has been completed. The result is shown in Fig. 19.18.

Fig. 19.18 Timing Results

After configuring NE-A’s time source, the following section introduces how to use TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT to manage NE-B timing.

Step 1: Select <Configuration>→<Synchronization management> from the main menu, a <Synchronization Management> window will appear as which is shown in Fig. 19.19.


290 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619


Step 2: The system has set #LC9<2×STM-1>Port1 and #LC10<2×STM-1>Port1 to reference timing sources automatically in default condition (the system can admit 4 reference timing sources simultaneously). If there is no setting, select them respectively, click <Add> to add them to the reference timing sources. Double-click #LC9<2×STM-1>Port3 reference, and a <Timing Source Reference Properties> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.20)

Fig. 19.20 Timing Source Reference Management

Step 3: Click <Priority> and set it to 1; click <QL Provisioned Mode> and set it to Auto; click <Apply>, then click <Close> to quit the window.

Step 4: If there is another link between NE-B and NE-A by #LC9<2×STM-1>, Port1 of NE-B, refer to step 3 and step 4, set reference timing source #LC9<2×STM-1> Port1, please note that this reference timing source’s priority should be set to 2. If there are other reference timing resources in timing resources, select the reference timing source, right-click ,and click


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 291

<Remove> in the pop-up window to remove the reference timing resource. Please remove all timing resources except #LC9<2×STM-1> Port1.

Step 5: Click <System Clock> in Fig. 19.19, The <System Clock> window will appear. Select <AutoSelection> in operation mode, and then click <Set Mode>. Click <Close> to quit the window.

Step 6: Timing management of NE-B has been completed.


NE-C timing configuration is the same as NE-B configuration steps. The network-timing configuration is now completed.

19.3 Configuring Layer 2 100Mbps Ethernet Service This example will illustrate how to configure L2 LCAS 100M Ethernet Service. Here 6×FE/L2 board is used in this example to show how to configure this service. Not all data board card support “bridge configuration“, for example, 8×FE/L2 does not support this function

Step1: Set Bridge’s property of NE

Right-click a data board card (such as 6× FE/L2), and the configuration menu will pop up (see Fig. 19.22). Click <Bridge Configuration>, and then the <Bridge Properties> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.23)


292 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 19.22 Bridge Configuration Tab

Fig. 19.23 Bridges Properties

In the <Bridge Mode> field, there are two options: <Double Tag> (default value) and <IEEE 802>. Generally, <Double Tag> is chosen. If the double tag mode is chosen, the PVID must be set on LAN ports. (Refer to Step 2).

Step 2: Configure LAN port of NE


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 293

Select <LAN Ports Property Configuration> (see Fig. 19.22), and the corresponding window will appear (see Fig. 19.24). Since there are many LAN ports in every data card, click <Port> in the top right corner of the window. Then select the corresponding port in the drop-down menu (the first LAN port is chosen in this example).

Fig. 19.24 LAN Port Property Configuration

The parameters that usually need to be set are as follows:

<PVID>: A default VLAN identification to the signal at the LAN port. The optional value is from 1 – 1000 and 1025 – 4094. If the <Bridge Mode> is set to be <Double Tag> in step 1, the PVID must be set on LAN ports.

<Monitored Mode> – Can be set as <Auto>, <Monitor>, or <Non-Monitor>.

<Admin Mode> – Can be set as <Enabled> or <Disabled>.

<Auto Laser Shutdown> – Can be set as <No> or <Yes>.

<Egress Tag Mode> – Can be set as <Untag> or <Tag>.

Check <BRL Enable> to make the BRL available, note that BRL cannot be configured in default configuration.

In the <Auto-Negotiation Parameter> section, if selecting <Enable> in the <Auto Negotiation> field, the other three parameters will turn grey. If not, setup these three parameters manually.

Click <Apply> and <Close> to complete the LAN port configuration.

Step 3: Configure WAN port of NE


294 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Select <WAN Ports Property Configuration> in Fig. 19.22, and the <WAN Port Config> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.25) Since there are many WAN ports in every data card, click <Port> in the top right corner of the window, and select the corresponding port in the drop-down menu (the first WAN port is chosen in the example).

Fig. 19.25 WAN Port Configuration

The following parameters need to be set:

<PVID>: Add a private VLAN mark to the signal at the WAN port. The optional value is from 1 – 1000 and 1025 – 4094.

<Egress Tag Mode>: There are two optional values: <Untag> and <Tag>. Usually the default is <Tag> mode, which ensures that additional PVID can be mapped to the load of SDH when the signals leave the data card from WAN port.

<Bandwidth Management>: Select the <LCAS Enable> mode. There are two options: <LCAS Enable> and <LCAS Disable>. Select <Enable LCAS> to enable the Ethernet’s traffic bandwidth which the user requires to be adjusted in accordance with the network

When the bandwidth configuration mode is confirmed, click <Bandwidth Management> to assign the capacity of WAN port. The <Bandwidth Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.26)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 295

Fig. 19.26 Bandwidth Management

There are two options in the <Direction> field: <bi-direction> and <uni-direction>. Bi-direction means configuration to both source and destination, which is the typical application. Uni-direction means source and destination configuration respectively.

There are two options in the <TP Type> field: <VC3> and <VC12>, while for 2GE+8×FE/AE card there’s no <TP Type>.

The slots in the optional AUG in the left side are idle (the slots which haven’t been taken). The slots shown in the right side is the slots configured to this WAN port. Select 46 AUGs in

the left side, and click button to add the slots used by those ports to WAN port. To decrease the number of slots used by this port, select corresponding slots in the right

side and click button.


Click <OK> to close this window and return to the <WAN Port Config> window.

Click <Apply> and <Close> to complete the WAN port configurations.

Step 4: Set VLAN management of NE

Through VLAN management, PVIDs can be set to pass the WAN port. If the double tag mode is chosen in step 1, the PVID must be set on LAN ports.

Select <VLAN management> as shown in Fig. 19.22, and the corresponding window will appear. (See Fig. 19.27)


296 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 19.27 VLAN Management

Click <VLAN Configuration>, and then the <VLAN Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.28)

Fig. 19.28 VLAN Configuration


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 297

There are two ways to modify VLAN: <Based on VLAN> and <Based on Ports>. To configure multiple ports with the same VLAN ID, the <Based on VLAN> mode is recommended. To configure a port with multiple VLAN IDs, the <Based on Ports> mode is recommended. Here the <Based on VLAN> mode is chosen.

Enter VLAN ID, and then click <Port List> to have all available ports listed in the left side.

Select the configured WAN port from the optional ports on the left side and click button to move it to optional ports. Input the VLAN ID configured for the selected port in the blank of <VLAN ID>. If needed, the VLAN ID can be named and inputted to the <VLAN Name> blank to help remember.



Note: To query VLAN ID of all the ports of data unit, click <Query> in the <VLAN Management> window (see Fig. 19.29). Detailed information will appear in the figure.

Fig. 19.29 VLAN Management: Query Result

Step 5: Create Cross Connection

After completing the Ethernet settings, a cross connection needs to be created between the SDH port and the Ethernet port.

To open the <Cross-Connect Management> window, select <Configuration> <Cross-Connect Management> from the main menu, or select the cross-connect and synchronize unit board in the Chassis View, right-click it, then select <Cross-Connect Management> in the pop-up menu.

Click <Create>, and then the <Create Cross-Connect> window will appear.

Select the properties for this cross connection using the drop-down menus: capacity is VC-12; Direction is bi-direction; source card is #LC7<1×STM-16>; source port is P01; destination

ii


298 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

card is #LC2<6×FE (L2)>; destination port is vP01(S1). Select 46 slots in left and 46 slots of WAN port configured in step1 in the right panel.


Click <Apply> to create those Cross Connections. Click <OK> to close this window. Those Cross Connections will appear in the <Cross-Connect Management> window. Now, the layer2 Ethernet service is configured successfully. Click <Close> to close the <Cross-Connect Management> window.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 299

Fig. 19.31 Cross-Connect Management

19.4 Monitoring One STM-16 Port Current Performance Step 1: From the main menu, select <Performance> <Current SDH Performance> to open the <SDH Performance Monitoring> window. (See Fig. 19.33)


300 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 19.32 Current SDH Performance Tab



A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 301

Step 2: Click <Filter> to open the <Monitor Point Filter> window.


Step 3: Click <Add> in the <Selected TPs> section and the <Select Terminal Point> window will appear.

Step 4: Select #CC2_LC<1×STM-16(4)> in the <Card> drop-down, <P01> in the Port item, and <All> in the <TP Type>. Click <Refresh>, all TPs of P01 of CC2_LC<1×STM-16(4)> card will be listed. To monitor only one TP type, select the corresponding type in this table. Choose TPs to be monitored and click <OK> to complete TP selection.


302 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619


Step 5: Select parameters to monitor, and click <OK>. The current Port01 performance for this STM-16 card will be listed.



A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 303


Click <Refresh>, to monitor the latest performance of the .selected TPs.

19.5 Creating Multiplex-Section Protection between Two NEs In linear Multiplex Section Protection (MSP), there are two physical paths between two multiplexors. The working section and protection section between multiplexors is connected using different optical interfaces. TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 supports MSP protection at STM-16, STM-4 and STM-1 rates.

NE-A NE-B

Fig. 19.38 Point-to-point System

Fig. 19.38 illustrates a point-to-point system between NE-A and NE-B. The working signal is transmitted through a pair of STM-4 ports while the protection signal is transmitted through another pair of STM-4 ports. To implement transmission protection, first the protection groups should be established in the NE to realize the connection between the working path and the protection path.

Step1: Select <Configuration>→<MSP Management> from the main menu. The <MSP Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.39)


304 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 19.39 Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group Management

Step2: Click <Create> and the <Create Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group> window will appear (See Fig. 19.40). Fill out the <Properties> section. The <Protection Group Label> provides a name for the protection group (for example <test> in Fig. 19.40); the <Switching Direction> can be selected as <unidirectional switch> or <bidirectional switch>; the <Operation Mode> can be selected as <non-revertive> or <revertive> with the <Wait to Restore> time between 0-720 seconds. Select #LC1<4×STM-4(1)> and P02 in the Working Multiplex Section. The System will fill out the Protection Multiplex Section with #LC1<4×STM-4(1)> and P04 automatically.

Fig. 19.40 Create Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group

Step3: Click <OK> to finish creating MSP, and created protection groups will appear in the <MSP Management> window, double-click this protection group to see the detail information.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 305

Fig. 19.41 Linear Multiplex Section Protection Group Management

19.6 Creating SNCP Using 2 Ports of STM-1 Sub-Network Connection Protection (SNCP) provides protection at VC-4-Xv/VC-3-Xv/ VC-12-Xv levels. In the transmission end, service is bridged to two output ports; the two signals are transmitted to the destination via different routes. One is main channel and the other is the backup channel. In the receiving end, the NE selects a better signal from the two coming signals. When the main channel has failed a system will switch to the protection SNCP channel to receive services.

To describe how to configure SNCP protection, an example of a four-node ring is shown in Fig. 19.42. Assume that a VC-4 connection between NE-A and NE-C needs to be established. The working channel is from NE-A, NE-B, to NE-C. The protection channel is from NE-A, NE-D, to NE-C.

Fig. 19.42 SNCP Example

To implement the SNCP, configure each NE as follows:


306 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Create a bi-directional VC-4 level cross-connection between an STM-1 unit port and a LC2 port AU4 of NE-A.

Create a bi-directional VC-4 level cross connection between the first LC1 port AU4 and the first LC2 port AU4 of NE D.

Create a bi-directional cross connection on the VC-4 level between an STM-1 unit port and the first LC1 port AU4 of NE C.

The following example is provided to create SNCP protection group using the TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT:

Step1: Select <Configuration>→<SNCP Management> from the main menu, the <SNCP Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.43)

Fig. 19.43 SNCP Management

Step2: Click <Create> and the <Create and Config SNCP> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.44) Click the <Capacity> drop-down menu and select VC-4. Select <Bidirectional> in the <Direction> dropdown menu. Set <Non-Revertive> in the <Restore Mode> dropdown menu.

Set the parameters in the Working TP section as:

Working Card: #LC1<4×STM-4(1)>

Working Port: P01

By Time Slot: AU4 (#02)

The working TP is the slot of the working channel cross-connection line port in NE-A.

Set the parameters in the Protection TP section as:

Protecting Card: #LC2<4× STM-4/(1)>

Protecting Port: P01

By Time Slot: AU4 (#02)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 307

Fig. 19.44 Create and Config SNCP

Step3: Click <Apply> and the SNCP is created successfully. For NE-A, the original bi-direction cross-connect provides the channel protection function. NE-A sends the signal to both line ports LC1 and LC2 simultaneously and selects the better one from the two received signals from LC1 and LC2. (See Fig. 19.45)

Fig. 19.45 SNCP Protection of NE A

Note: The way to create channel protection of NE-C is the same as that in NE-A. The difference is the working TP and protection TP are opposite to those of NE-A.

After creation of the SNCP protection group, click <Query> in Fig. 19.43 to view the existing SNCP protection group. Select the corresponding protection group, and click <Switch>. The <SNCP Switch> window will appear (See Fig. 19.46). In this window the condition of the

ii


308 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

current protection group is known. In the meantime, the protection switch operation for the SNCP protection group is done manually by clicking <Command List>.

Fig. 19.46 SNCP Switch

<Clear>: This command clears all commands that have been started as well as the NE operation recovery time.

<Lock Out>: Protection switching will shut down, and the working channel will take on the service. Even if there is malfunction, switching will not occur.

<Force Switch to Protection>: Users switch services to the protection channel by force even if there is a fault on this channel. If the force switch requirement is not cleared, automatic switching will not occur.

<Force Switch to Working>: User will switch service to the working channel by force even if there is a fault on this channel. If the force switch requirement is not cleared, automatic switching will not occur.

<Manual Switch to Protection>: Users switch services to the protection channel manually on the condition that there is no fault on this channel. Automatic switching is still in effect.

<Manual Switch to Working>: Users switch services to working channel manually on the condition that there is no fault on this channel. Automatic switching is still in effect.

19.7 Creating MS-SPRing Protection for STM-16 Ring The TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT provides the function of creating and viewing MS-SPRing information. Before creating a new MS-SPRing, the user must know the ring topology and link information about the NE.

Note: The MS-SPRing function can be supported in STM-4; STM-16 configuration for TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060.

Follow the steps below to create a new ring with MS-SRPing Protection:

Step 1: Select <Configuration> <MS-SPRing Management> from the main menu. The <MS-SPRing Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.47)

ii


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 309

Fig. 19.47 MS-SPRing Management

Step 2: In the <MS-SPRing Management> window, click <Create>. The <Create Ring> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.48)

Fig. 19.48 Set Ring Property

Input a number as <Ring ID> and arbitrary string as <Ring Name>. Click <OK> to set the NEs in the ring.

Note: The maximum number of NEs in the ring is 16, and the Ring ID should be a number between 1 and 5000. If the information is incorrect or some items are not inputted, a warning window will appear. (See Fig. 19.49 )

Fig. 19.49 Warning Window

ii


310 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Step 3: A <Create Ring> window will appear. A number of NEs will appear on the window. The number of NEs equals the number that the user input in the previous window. (See Fig. 19.50)

Fig. 19.50 Create Ring

Click the icon of each NE, and input the corresponding IP address in the pop-up window. The IP address will appear below the icon of the NE. Click each of the links to set up the Link Port properties in the pop-up window. (See Fig. 19.51) Select slot number and port number for the local LCT from the drop-down menus of the <Link Port> panel. Input <Slot number> and <Port Number> for the peer LCT in the <Peer Link Port> panel. Click <OK> to confirm. After a link is correctly configured, the color of that link will turn green. (See Fig. 19.52)

Fig. 19.51 Select Link Port


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 311

Fig. 19.52 Create Ring – NEs and links Successful Confugured

When all the NEs and links are configured, click <OK> in the <Create Ring> window, and a confirmation dialog will pop up. Click <Yes> to confirm to add protection to the ring. (See Fig. 19.53)

Fig. 19.53 Confirm to add protection

Then the MS-SPRing is created, and it will be listed in <MS-SPRing Management> window. (See Fig. 19.54)

Fig. 19.54 MS-SPRing List


312 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

19.8 Creating 1+1 Equipment Protection for Electrical STM-1 Card TNMS-M SURPASS hiT 7060 LCT provides 1+1 equipment protection for the electrical STM-1 card. 1+1 Protection enhances the system reliability. It consists of one protection resource for taking the role of the working resource of the same type in case of fault conditions or Element Management System (EMS) requests. Equipment protection is made on a card basis. It is used to protect against the card removal and the card failure. There must be two same function cards available on NE at the same time.

Take the following steps to create 1+1 Equipment Protection for the electrical STM-1 card.

Step 1: Select <Configuration>→<1+1 Equipment Protection Management> from the main menu. The <Equipment Protection Group Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.55)

Fig. 19.55 Equipment Protection Group Management

Step 2: Click the <Create> button in the <EPG Management> window. The <Create EPG> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.56)

Fig. 19.56 Create EPG

Step 3: Select <STM-1 E> or <STM-1 EW> from the <Equipment Type> drop-down menu. Choose the <Working Card> and <Protection Card> from the corresponding drop-down menu (if can be chosen). Click <Create> to create this EPG.


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 313

Step 4: When the EPG is created, a prompt window will appear. (See Fig. 19.57)

Fig. 19.57 Create EPG – Successfully

Step 5: A new window will pop up. Click <Yes> to enable this EPG. (See Fig. 19.58)

Fig. 19.58 Enable EPG

Step 6: When the EPG is enabled, a prompt window will appear. Click <OK> to continue. (See Fig. 19.59)

Fig. 19.59 Enable EPG – Successfully

The EPG is successfully created. It will appear in the <Equipment Protection Group Management> window. (See Fig. 19.60)

Fig. 19.60 Create EPG – Finish


314 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

19.9 Creating RPR Service Station Take the following steps to create an RPR service station:

Step 1: Select <RPR>→<RPR Service Configuration> from the main menu. The <RPR Service Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.61)

Fig. 19.61 RPR Service Configuration

Input an arbitrary string of text as <Service Label> to identify the service.

Select the priority from the <Service Class> drop-down menu. The priority follows the order: <A>, <B>, <C>.

Input a number as <Service ID> of this RPR service. The number should be an integer between 1 and 65535.

Select the <Service Mode> from the drop-down menu. There are two available modes: <P2P> and <MP2MP>.

Select the <Wrap Protection> mode. Available values are <enable> and <disable>.

Step 2: After you configure the basic information, click <Configuration> to add a new station to this service. The <Add RPR Service> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.62)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 315

Fig. 19.62 Add RPR Service

All available stations are listed in left panel. Select stations and click <Add> to make the <RPR Service Station Configuration> window appear. (See Fig. 19.63)


Step 3: In the <RPR Service Station Configuration> window, set the following attributes:

1. <Client Port>: Local Ethernet port

2. <Servie Type>: There are three types, <Port Based>, <Port + VLAN Based> and <Port+VLAN+Prio Based>.

3. <Ringlet>: The ringlet which carries the service.

4. <Maximum Bandwidth>: Indicate how much bandwidth this service can occupy.

5. <Remote MAC>: Remote MAC address, only for p2p service mode.


316 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Step 4: In the <RPR Service Station Configuration> window, click button beside the <Maximum Bandwidth> box. The <Rate Limiting Pre-Configuration> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.64)

Fig. 19.64 Rate Limiting Pre-Configuration

The <Rate Limiting List> table shows the current Rate Limit setting. You can modify current rate limit setting or add new one in the <Add or Modify Rate Limit> panel.

6. Add Rate Limit:

1. Select one Rate Limit Index from 1 to 8 except those numbers which have been occupied and input corresponding limited rate which unit is kb/s.

2. Click <OK> to add a new rate limit item.

Note: There should be 8 levels of rate limit in every station.

7. Modify Rate Limit:

1. Select the rate limit index that you want to modify and input new limited rate.

2. Click <OK> and confirm this modify.

Note: The rate limit can’t be modified unless there is no service using this rate.

Step 5: After you configure the <Add RPR Service> window, the information of the added station will appear in the <Add Station> panel in the <RPR Service Configuration> window. (See Fig. 19.65)


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 317

Fig. 19.65 Add RPR Service Station – Finish

To delete an RPR service station, take the following steps:

Step 1: Select <RPR>→<RPR Service Management> from the main menu. The <RPR Service Management> window will appear. (See Fig. 19.66)

Fig. 19.66 RPR Service Management

Step 2: Click <Query>, and the available RPR Service will be listed in the <RPR Service List> panel. (See Fig. 19.67)


318 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

Fig. 19.67 RPR Service Management – Query Result

Step 3: Click <Delete> and select <Yes> in the pop-up window (See Fig. 19.68). The RPR service will be deleted.

Fig. 19.68 Delete RPR Service – Confirm Window


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 319

20 Abbreviation ACL Access Control List AIS Alarm Indication Signal ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode AU Administration Unit BBE Background Block Error CC Cross-Connect CF Compact Flash CLI Command Line Interface CoS Class of Service CSES Continuous Severely Errored Second DCC Data Communication Channel DEG Degraded EM Element Management EOW Ethernet over WDM EQP Equipped ES Errored Second EXC Excessive error FC Fault Count FE Fast Ethernet, Far End FOP Failure of Protocol GE Gigabit Ethernet GFP General Framing Procedure HP High Path IOP Input Optical Power LAN Local Area Network LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme LCD Loss of Cell Delineation LB Laser Bias LOC Loss Of Continuity LOM Loss of Multiframe LOP Loss of Pointer LOS Loss of Signal LP Low Path MS Multiplex Section MS-SPRing Multiplex Section Shared Protection Ring MSP Multiplex Section Protection MSTP Multi-Service Transport Platform NE Network Element NPJC Negative Pointer Justification Count OCD Out of Cell Delineation OFS Out of Frame Second OOP Output Optical Power


320 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy PJCN Pointer Change Negative PLM Payload Mismatch PPI PDH Physical Interface PPJC Positive Pointer Justification Count QoS Quality of Service RDI Remote Defect Indication RS Regenerator Section SC System Control SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SECB Severely Error Cell Block SES Severely Errored Second SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SPI SDH Physical Interface TCA Threshold Crossing Alert TDM Time Division Multiplexing TIM Trace Identification Mismatch TLS Transparent LAN Service TP Termination Point TU Tributary Unit UAS Un-Available Second UNEQ Unequipped VC Virtual Concatenation VPN Virtual Private Network VSTM Virtual STM


A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619 321

21 Index

A ACL Configuration, 127 Add Cross-Connection, 91 AIS/RDI Insertion Test, 203 Alarm

Alarm Configuration, 271 Clearing Alarms, 260

Alarm, 256 Viewing Active Alarms, 257

C Card Configuration and Management, 79 CC 1+1 Protection, 156 CC Configuration and Management, 90

D Delete Card, 81 Deleting Connection, 92 Domain Control, 61

E EOW Configuration, 103 Ethernet Configuration and Management, 105

F Fault Management, 268 FTP Settings, 71

G Group Broadcast, 129

H Hardware Configuration, 26

I Install LCT software package, 33

L LAN Card Configuration, 105, 109 LED Indicators, 264 LED Test, 205 Linear Multiplex Section Group Protection, 166 Lock Screen, 61 Loop-back Test, 201

M Main Window, 44 Maintenance, 200 MIB Management, 75 MSSPRING, 170, 308

N NE Property Configuration, 65 NE Software Management, 72 Node Event Log, 275

O OSI Configuration, 182

P Performance Monitoring, 207 PRBS Test, 200 Priority Algorithm, 116

R RSTP Configuration, 133

S SDH Port Configuration and Management, 81 Security Management, 51 Shut Down LCT, 43 Shutdown NE, 68 SNCP, 162 Software Configuration, 27 Start LCT, 40 Static MAC Address, 125 Synchronization Management, 97 Synchronize, 64

T Timing Setting, 76 TP Configuration and Management, 93

U Uninstall LCT Software Package, 38

V VLAN Management, 122


322 A42022-L5969-F 53-4-7619

W WAN Port Configuration, 117

hit_7060_umn

Documents

Transcript of hit_7060_umn